B.E. ( ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 2011 ...

B.E. ( ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING)

2011 Regulation, Curriculum & Syllabi

BANNARI AMMAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY (An Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai

Approved by AICTE, NACC with ‘A’ Grade and ISO 9001:2008 Certified)

SATHYAMANGALAM-638401 Erode District Tamilnadu Phone: 04295 226000 Fax: 04295 226666

Web: www.bitsathy.ac.in E-mail:[email protected]

http://www.bitsathy.ac.in/

mailto:E-mail:[email protected]

CONTENTS

Page No

Regulations i

PEOs x

POs xi

Mapping of PEOs and Pos xii

Connectivity Chart xiii

Curriculum 2011 xiv

Syllabi (I-VIII Semester) 1

Electives 114

i

RULES AND REGULATIONS

B. E. /B. Tech. Programmes

(for the batches of candidates admitted in Academic year 2011-2012 and subsequently)

NOTE: The regulations hereunder are subject to amendments as may be decided by the Academic

Council of the Institute from time to time. Any or all such amendments will be effective from such

date and to such batches of students (including those already in the middle of the programme) as

may be decided by the Academic Council.

1. Conditions for Admission

Candidates for admission to the B.E. / B.Tech. degree programmes will be required to satisfy the

conditions of admission thereto prescribed by the Anna University of Technology, Coimbatore and

the Government of Tamil Nadu.

2. Duration of the Programme

(i) For purposes of these regulations, the academic year will be normally spanning from June to

May. Each academic year will be divided into Two semesters, the odd semester normally

spanning from June to November and the even semester from December to May.

(ii) Minimum Duration: The Programme will extend over a period of Four years with Eight

semesters (3 years with six semesters for lateral entry) leading to the Degree of Bachelor of

Engineering (B.E.) / Bachelor of Technology (B.Tech.) of the Anna University of Technology,

Coimbatore.

(iii) Maximum Duration: The candidate shall be required to successfully complete all the

requirements to qualify for the award of B.E./B.Tech. degree programme within a maximum

period of 7 years (6 years for lateral entry), these periods reckoned from the commencement of

the semester to which the candidate was first admitted to the programme.

3. Branches of Study

B. E. Programmes

I Aeronautical Engineering

II Civil Engineering

III Computer Science and Engineering

IV Electrical and Electronics Engineering

V Electronics and Communication Engineering

VI Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

VII Mechanical Engineering

VIII Mechatronics Engineering

B. Tech. Programmes

I Biotechnology

II Information Technology

III Textile Technology

IV Textile Technology (Fashion Technology)

4. Structure of Programmes

i. The curriculum will consist of courses of study (Theory, Practical, Project) and Personality

Development Programme and syllabi as prescribed by the respective Boards of Studies

from time to time.

ii

ii. A Diagnostic Test will be administered to all the BE/BTech students at the entry level to

identify their level of proficiency in English and they will be brought under two streams

namely A Stream and B Stream. Students under A Stream will study Communicative

English and B Stream will study Basic English 1 under Language Elective I in the I

Semester. In the second semester, A Stream will be further divided into two categories

based on their English language proficiency in the end semester examination and the upper

segment will study German / Japanese / French / Hindi and the remaining students will

study Advanced Communicative English. The students under B Stream will study Basic

English II.

iii. Every student will be required to opt for six electives from the list of electives. Under

Choice Based Credit System (CBCS), students can opt for any course as elective in

consultation with respective HoDs during VIth

& VIIth

Semesters from any branches of B.E

/ B.Tech. Programme including electives pertaining to Physical Sciences. (not more than

two from Physical Sciences)

iv. Candidates can also opt for one credit courses of 15 to 20 hours duration which will be

offered at our institution from industry / other institution / our institution on specialised

topics. Candidates can complete such one-credit courses during the semesters III to VI as

and when these courses are offered by different departments. A candidate will also be

permitted to register for the one credit courses of other departments provided the

candidate has fulfilled the necessary pre-requisites of the course being offered subject to

approval by both the Heads of Departments. Credits will be indicated for these courses in

the grade sheet, but it will not be considered for computing CGPA. However, if a

candidate wishes to avail exemption of electives V or elective VI of the VIII Semester,

he/she can do so by exercising his/her option in writing to the respective Head of the

Department during the beginning of the VIII Semester by following the equivalence norm

that one elective in the VIII Semester is equivalent to three one-credit courses

completed by the candidate during the previous semesters.

v. Every student will be required to undertake a suitable project work in Industry /

Department during VII semester in consultation with the Head of the Department and the

faculty guide and submit the project report Phase I and thereon submit the project report

Phase II at the end of the VIII Semester on dates announced by the Institute/Department.

vi. A candidate can register for Self-Study Elective(s) over and above the electives from any

branch of Engineering / Technology one per semester starting from V semester onwards

provided he/she maintains a Cumulative Grade Point Average(CGPA) of 7.5 or above till

the previous semesters with no standing arrears. Credits will be indicated for these courses

in the grade sheet, but it will not be considered for computing CGPA.

5. Special Courses:

Students can opt for any one of the special courses as self-study in addition to the courses

specified in the curriculum in V, VI and VII semesters to get exposure in the recent

research areas, under the guidance of the faculty provided he/she maintenance a minimum

CGPA of 7.5 till the previous semester with no standing arrears. The credits obtained will

be indicated in the grade sheet, but will not be considered for CGPA.

6. Certificate Courses:

Students can opt for any one of the certificate courses offered in the various departments in IV,

V, VI and VII semesters. A separate certificate will be issued on successful completion of the

course.

7. Requirements of Attendance and Progress

(I) Minimum Attendance: A candidate will be deemed to have completed the requirements

of study of any semester only if:

iii

a) He / she has kept not less than 70% of attendance in each course and at least 80% of attendance

on an average in all the courses in that semester put together.

[However, a candidate who secures less than 70% of attendance in any subject(s) will not be

permitted to appear for the examinations in those subject(s).He / she will be allowed to makeup

the shortage of the attendance immediately after that particular semester examinations, as

prescribed by the subject faculty, HoD and Principal. The candidate will be allowed to appear

for the examination in the respective subjects(s) at the next opportunity and such an appearance

will be considered as second attempt

a candidate who has secured attendance between 70% & 79% in the current semester due to

medical reasons (hospitalization / accident/ specific illness) or due to participation in Institute/

University/ State/ National/ International level sports events with prior permission from the

Principal shall be given exemption from the prescribed attendance requirements and he/she

shall be permitted to appear for the current semester examinations.]

b) His / her academic progress and conduct have been satisfactory

(II) Personality Development : Every candidate shall be required to undergo a minimum of 40

hours of Personality Development Programme viz, NSS / NCC / YRC / YOGA / Sports and

Games activities during the first year failing which he/she will not be permitted to appear for

the Semester - End examinations of semester III onwards. Such candidates are permitted to

appear for the Semester - End examinations of semester III onwards only after completing

the above mentioned requirement.

The record of attendance for Personality Development Programmes shall be maintained and

sent to the Academic Section at the end of 1st

and 2nd

Semesters.

National Cadet Corps (NCC) will have parades.

National Service Scheme (NSS) will have social service activities in the community and

camps.

Youth Red Cross (YRC) society activities will include peace time activities like health and

hygiene, international friendship, awareness camps, etc.

Yoga will be practiced through Yoga master

Sports and Games will include preparation for Intra Institute and inter-collegiate sports

events.

8. Procedure for Completing Programme

(i) A candidate will be permitted to proceed to the courses of study of any semester only, if he / she

has satisfied the requirements of attendance and progress in respect of the preceding semester and

had registered for the highest semester examination for which he / she was eligible to register.

vide Clause 7. In the case of project work, no candidate will be permitted to appear for the project

work examination unless he /she had submitted the project report not later than the prescribed

date.

(ii) A candidate who is required to repeat the study of any semester for want of attendance /

unsatisfactory progress and conduct or who desires to rejoin the course after a period of

discontinuance or who upon his / her own request is permitted by the authorities to repeat the

study of any semester, may join the semester for which he / she is eligible or permitted to rejoin,

only at the time of its normal commencement for a regular batch of candidates and after obtaining

the approval from the Director of Technical Education and Anna University of Technology,

Coimbatore. No candidate will however be enrolled in more than one semester at any time. In the

case of repeaters, the earlier assessment in the repeated courses will be disregarded.

9. Assessment

(i) The assessment will be based on the performance in the Semester - End examinations and / or

continuous assessment, carrying marks as specified in Clause 12.

n

n

iv

(ii) At the end of each semester, final examinations will normally be conducted during

October/November and during April / May of each year. Supplementary examinations may also

be conducted at such times as may be decided by the Institute.

(iii) (a) Continuous Assessment Marks will be awarded on the basis of Continuous Evaluation made

during the semester as per the scheme given in Clause 12.

(Credit assignment: Each course is normally assigned with certain number of credits @ 1 credit

per one hour of lecture, 0.5 credit per one hour of tutorial/practical per week.)

(b) The letter grade and the grade point are awarded based on the percentage of marks secured

by a candidate in individual course as detailed below:

Range of Percentage of

Total Marks Letter

grade Grade Point

(g) 90 to 100 S 10 80 to 89 A 9 70 to 79 B 8 60 to 69 C 7 55 to 59 D 6 50 to 54 E 5 0 to 49 RA 0 Incomplete I 0 Withdrawal W 0 Absent AB 0

RA − Reappearance in the course.

(A candidate who fails in the Semester - End Examination in any course(s)

including Project Work after having registered for the same, shall be

awarded grade RA.)

I − Incomplete (as per clause 7 (I) & (II)) and hence prevented from writing

Semester – End Examination.

W − Withdrawal from the Semester - End Examination

vide clause 11

AB − Absent

(A candidate who is eligible but fails to register and also fails to appear after

registration for the Semester - End examination will be awarded the grade AB.)

(c) After completion of the programme, the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA)

from the I Semester to VIII Semester (from III to VIII semester for lateral entry)is

calculated using the formula:

CGPA =

∑1 g

i * C

i

∑1 Ci

where gi

: Grade Point secured corresponding to the course.

Ci

: Credit allotted to the course.

n : Total number of courses for the entire programme.

10. (a). Passing Requirements and Provisions

i. The minimum number of total credits to be earned by a candidate to qualify for the award of

degree in the various branches of study as prescribed by the respective Boards of Studies is

given below:

v

Branch of Study

Minimum Credits

entry at first

semester

lateral entry

at third

semester BE Programmes Aeronautical Engineering 193 141

Civil Engineering 193 141 Computer Science and Engineering 192 142 Electrical and Electronics Engineering 193 143 Electronics and Communication Engineering 193 141 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 192 142 Mechanical Engineering 193 143 Mechatronics Engineering 192 142 B Tech Programmes B.Tech. Biotechnology 192 143 B.Tech. Information Technology 193 143 B.Tech. Textile Technology 192 143 B.Tech. Textile Technology (Fashion Technology) 193 141

(Students Migration- Credit Accounting) Normalisation of the credits will be carried out in consultation with the BoS chairman of the

concerned branch & approval by the chairman of Governing Council to the students migrating

from other institutions to Bannari Amman Institute of Technology

ii. A candidate who secures a minimum of 50% marks in the Semester - End Examinations of a

course and a minimum Grade point 5 with internal assessment and Semester - End

Examination put together will be declared to have passed that course.

iii. A candidate, who absents or withdraws or is disqualified to appear (as per clause 7 (I) and (II)) or

secures a letter grade RA (Grade Point 0) or less than 50% in the Semester - End

Examination in any course carrying Internal Assessment and Semester - End Examination

Marks, will retain the already earned Internal Assessment Marks for two subsequent attempts

only of that course and thereafter he / she will be solely assessed by Semester - End

examination marks..

iv. A candidate shall be declared to have qualified for award of B.E/B.Tech. degree if

(i) He/she successfully completed the courses requirement (vide clause 7 ) and has passed all the

prescribed courses of study of the respective programme listed in clause 13 within the

duration specified in clause 2 and

(ii) No disciplinary action is pending against him/her.

(b). Classification of degree

i. First Class with Distinction : A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide

clause 10 a (iv) ) having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters

for lateral entry candidates) at the first opportunity, within eight consecutive semesters (six

consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after the commencement of his /her study

and securing a CGPA of 8.5 and above (vide clause 9c) shall be declared to have passed in

First Class with Distinction. For this purpose the withdrawal from examination (vide clause

11) will not be construed as an opportunity for appearance in the examination.

ii. First Class : A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 10 a (iv))

having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters (six semesters for lateral entry

candidates) within maximum period of ten consecutive semesters (eight consecutive semesters

for lateral entry candidates) after the commencement of his /her study and securing a CGPA of

6.50 and above shall be declared to have passed in First Class.

vi

iii. Second Class : All other candidates who qualify for the award of the degree shall be

declared to have passed in Second Class.

11. Withdrawal from the Examination

(i) A candidate may, for valid reasons, be granted permission by the Principal to withdraw from

appearing for the examination in any course or courses of only one semester examination

during the entire duration of the degree programme. Also, only ONE application for

withdrawal is permitted for that semester examination in which withdrawal is sought.

(ii) Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to write the

examination and if it is made prior to the commencement of the examination in that course or

courses and also recommended by the Head of the Department.

(iii) Withdrawal shall not be construed as an opportunity for appearance in the examination for the

eligibility of a candidate for First Class with Distinction.

12. Scheme of Assessment

(a) (i) THEORY

Semester - End Examination : 50 Marks

Internal Assessment : 50 Marks

Distribution of marks for Internal Assessment:

Assignments 10

Test 1 10

Test 2 10

Model Examination 20

----

50

----

An optional test will be conducted in the respective test portion after the second test, to the students

who opt, on valid reasons

(ii) THEORY - ONE CREDIT COURSE

TOTAL 100 Marks



Distribution of Marks for Internal Assessment: Assignment (Two Assignments) 10

Test I 15

Test II 15

Viva voce 10

----

50

----

vii

(b) (i) PRACTICAL (Without Mini Project)



Distribution of Marks for Internal Assessment

Preparation 10

Observation & Results 15

Record 10

Model Examination & Viva-Voce 15

----

50

----

(ii) Practical (With Mini Project)



Distribution of Marks for Internal Assessment

Preparation 05

Observation & Results 10

Record 10

Mini Project Report 10

Model Examination & Viva-Voce 15

----

50

----

(c) THEORY WITH LABORATORY COMPONENT

Semester - End Theory Examination : 50 Marks


Theory

Test I 10.0

Test II 10.0

Model (Theory) 15.0

Practical

Observation & Results 5.0

Model Practical 10.0

-----

50.0

-----

(d) SPECIAL COURSES

Internal Assessment: 100 Marks

State of Art 20

Preparation 15

Presentation 10

Discussion & Conclusion 15

Viva - voce 40

----

100

----

(e) SELF STUDY ELECTIVES



Assignments (minimum 2 Nos) 15

Test I 10

Test II 10

Model 15

----

50

----

viii

(f) LANGUAGE ELECTIVES

Test 1 : 15 Marks

Test 2 : 15 Marks

Listening Test : 10 Marks

Speaking Test : 10 Marks

Final Examination : 50 Marks

--------

: 100 Marks

--------

(g) PROJECT WORK

i) PHASE – I



Distribution of Marks for Internal assessment

Literature survey (one seminar) 10

Problem formulation 10

Approach (one seminar) 15

Progress (one seminar) 15

------

Total 50

------

Distribution of Marks for Semester - End Examination

Report Preparation & Presentation 25

Viva-Voce 25

-----

50

-----

ii) PHASE – II



Distribution of Marks for Internal assessment

Continuation of Approach & Progress 40

(Two seminars – 2x20)

Findings, Discussion & Conclusion 60

(Two seminars - 2x30)

-----

Total 100

-----

Distribution of Marks for Semester - End Examination

Report Preparation & Presentation 50

Viva Voce 50

-----

100

-----

ix

(h) TECHNICAL SEMINAR

Internal Assessment: 100 Marks

Two Seminars (2 X 50) 100

Distribution of Marks Each Seminar Report Evaluation 10

Presentation 20

Viva – voce 20

----

50

----

(A team of 2 members and HOD constituted by the Principal, will evaluate the seminar report and

conduct the viva-voce for assessment.)

13) Curriculum and Syllabi

Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech. | Regulation 2011 x

Approved in Sixth Academic Council Meeting

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

On successful completion of 4 year BE degree programme quite a few years after graduation our graduates will PEO1: Work in Energy/Power sectors / Software domain or be an Entrepreneur. PEO2: Involve in Inter/multidisciplinary teams and assume position

of leadership and responsibility in their career. PEO3: Adapt to the world of constantly evolving technology.

Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech. | Regulation 2011 xi


PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

On completion of the Programme, students will have

PO1: An ability to apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex

Electrical and Electronics engineering problem.

PO2: An ability to identify, formulate, research literature, and analyze

complex engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions

using first principles of mathematics and engineering sciences.

PO3: An ability to design solutions for complex engineering problems and

design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with

appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, cultural, societal

and environmental considerations.

PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods

including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and

synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.

PO5: An ability to create, select, and apply appropriate techniques,

resources, and modern engineering tools including prediction and modeling

to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.

PO6: An ability to apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to

assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent

responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.

PO7: An ability to understand the impact of the professional engineering

solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the

knowledge of, and need for sustainable development.

PO8: An ability to apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics

and responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.

PO9: An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or

leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.

PO10: An ability to communicate effectively on complex engineering activities

with the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being

able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation,

make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.

PO11: An ability to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the

engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work,

as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in

multidisciplinary environments.

PO12: An ability to recognize the need for, and have the preparation and

ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest

context of technological change.

Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech. | Regulation 2011 Approved in Sixth Academic Council Meeting

xii

MAPPING OF PEOs AND POs

Programme Educational Objectives

Program Outcomes

PEO :

I Work in Energy/Power sectors / Software domain

or be an Entrepreneur.

PO1,PO2,PO3,PO4,PO

5,PO7,PO8,PO9,PO10,

PO12

PEO :

II

Involve in Inter/multidisciplinary teams and

assume position of leadership and responsibility in

their career.

PO1,PO3,PO4,PO5,PO

6,PO8,PO9,PO10,PO11

PEO :

III

Adapt to the world of constantly evolving

technology.

PO1,PO2,PO4,PO6,PO

7,PO11,PO12

T OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CONNECTIVITY

CHART

Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech. | Regulation 2011


xiv

B.E - ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING (Minimum Credits to be earned: 193)

First Semester

Code No.

Course

Objectives &

Outcomes

L

T

P

C

PEOs POs

11O101 Engineering Mathematics I* PEO1 PO1, PO2 3 1 0 3.5

11O102 Engineering Physics* PEO1 PO1, PO2 3 0 0 3.0

11O103 Engineering Chemistry* PEO1 PO1, PO2 3 0 0 3.0

Language Elective I‡ 3 0 0 3.0

11E105 Electric Circuit Analysis I PEO1 PO1, PO2 3 1 0 3.5

11E106 “C” Programming PEO1 PO4 2 0 2 3.0

11E107 Electron Devices and Circuits PEO1 PO4, PO5 3 0 0 3.0

11O208 Engineering Graphics$ PEO1 PO3, PO5 2 0 2 3.0

11E209 Workshop Practice PEO1 PO3, PO5 0 0 2 1.0

Total 22 2 6 26.0

Second Semester

Code No.

Course

Objectives &

Outcomes

L

T

P

C

PEOs POs

11O201 Engineering Mathematics II* PEO1 PO1, PO2 3 1 0 3.5

11O202 Environmental Science * PEO1 PO3 3 0 0 3.0

Language Elective II‡ 3 1 0 3.5

11E204 Materials Science PEO1 PO1, PO2 3 0 0 3.0

11O105 Basics of Civil and Mechanical

Engineering**

PEO1 PO3, PO5

4

0

0

4.0

11E206 Electric Circuit Analysis II PEO1 PO2, PO3 PO5

3 1 0 3.5

11E207 Electric Circuits Laboratory PEO1 PO4, PO5 0 0 3 1.5

11O108 Engineering Physics Laboratory♦

PEO1 PO1, PO2 0 0 2 1.0

11O109 Engineering Chemistry

Laboratory#

PEO1 PO1, PO2

0

0

2

1.0

Total 19 3 7 24.0

* Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech $

Common for CE, EEE, ME, BT, IT & TT (I Semester); AE, CSE, ECE, EIE & FT (II Semester) ‡ Common to all branches of B.E/B.Tech (Continuous Assessment ) **

Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech except AE & CE, ECE, EIE, ME, BT & TT (I Semester) ;

CSE, EEE, FT, IT & TT (II Semester)

# Common to CE, CSE, AE, ECE & EIE (I Semester) and to ME, EEE, BT, IT, TT & FT (II Semester) ♦

Common to AE, CSE, ECE, EIE & ME (I Semester) and to CE, EEE, BT, IT, TT & FT (II Semester)

Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech. | Regulation 2011 xv


Third Semester

Code No.

Course

Objectives &

Outcomes

L

T

P

C PEOs POs

11O301 Engineering Mathematics III♥ PEO1 PO1, PO2 3 1 0 3.5

11E302 Applied Thermodynamics♦ PEO1 PO3 3 0 0 3.0

11E303 Field Theory PEO1 PO3 3 1 0 3.5

11E304 DC Machines and Transformers PEO1 PO1, PO2,

PO4

4 0 0 4.0

11E305

Measurements and

Instrumentation Systems

PEO3 PO2, PO5,

PO12

3

0

0

3.0

11E306 Concepts Of Engineering Design PEO2 PO9, PO11 3 0 0 3.0

11E307 Object Oriented Programming PEO1 PO4 3 0 0 3.0

11E308 Electron Devices and Circuits Laboratory

PEO1 PO4, PO5

0

0

3

1.5

11E309 DC Machines and Transformers

Laboratory PEO1 PO3, PO4

0

0

3

1.5

Total

22

2

6

26.0

Fourth Semester

Code No.

Course

Objectives &

Outcomes

L

T

P

C

PEOs POs

11E401 Numerical Methods and Operations Research

PEO1 PO1, PO2

3

1

0

3.5

11E402 AC Machines PEO1 PO1, PO3,

PO4

4 0 0 4.0

11E403 Control Engineering PEO1 PO2, PO3,

PO12

3 1 0 3.5

11E404 Power Systems I PEO1 PO1, PO2, PO3

3 0 0 3.0

11E405 Linear Integrated Circuits PEO1 PO2, PO3 3 0 0 3.0

11E406 Digital Logic Circuits PEO1 PO2, PO3 3 0 0 3.0

11E407 Data Structures PEO1 PO4 2 0 2 3.0

11E408 Instrumentation and Control

Laboratory PEO3 PO3, PO4,

PO9

0

0

3

1.5

11E409

AC Machines Laboratory PEO1 PO3, PO4

0

0

3

1.5

Total

21

2

8

26.0

♥

Common for all branches of B.E / B.Tech except BT and CSE ♦

Common to EEE & EIE



xvi

Fifth Semester

Code No.

Course

Objectives & Outcomes

L

T

P

C

PEOs POs

11E501 Electrical Machine Design PEO1 PO2, PO3 3 0 0 3.0

11E502 Power Systems II PEO1 PO2, PO3, PO12

3 1 0 3.5

11E503 Power Electronics PEO3 PO2, PO3,

PO12

3 0 0 3.0

11E504 Microprocessor and

Microcontrollers

PEO2 PO5, PO6

3

0

0

3.0

11E505 Special Electrical Machines PEO1 PO5, PO7 3 0 0 3.0

Elective I 3 0 0 3.0

11E507 Linear & Digital IC Laboratory PEO1 PO3, PO5 0 0 3 1.5

11E508 Power Electronics Laboratory PEO3 PO3, PO9,

PO12

0 0 3 1.5

11E509 Microprocessor Based System

Design Laboratory PEO2 PO5, PO7

0

0

3

1.5

11E510 Technical Seminar I PEO3 PO10

0

0 2 1.0

Total

18

1

11 24.0 1

Sixth Semester

Code No.

Course

Objectives &

Outcomes

L

T

P

C

PEOs POs

11E601 Solid State Drives PEO1 PO2, PO3,

PO12

3 0 0 3.0

11E602 Embedded Systems PEO3 PO5, PO7 3 0 0 3.0

11E603 Power System Operation and

Control

PEO1 PO3, PO5,

PO6

3

1

0

3.5

11E604 Power System Protection and

Switch Gear

PEO1 PO2, PO3

3

0

0

3.0

11E605 Digital Signal Processing PEO1 PO3, PO4 3 1 0 3.5

Elective II 3 0 0 3.0

11E607

Embedded Systems Laboratory PEO1 PO5, PO7

0

0

3

1.5

11E608

Control Engineering Laboratory PEO1 PO3, PO4,

PO5

0

0

3

1.5

11E609 Technical Seminar II PEO3 PO10

0

0 2 1.0

Total 18 2 8 23.01

1

Minimum credits to be appeared. The maximum number of credits as well as the total number of L T P

hours may vary depending upon the electives oftened



xvii

Seventh Semester

Code No.

Course

Objectives &

Outcomes

L

T

P

C

PEOs POs

11O701 Engineering Economics* PEO1 PO11, PO12 2 0 0 2.0

11E702 Electric Power Generation PEO1 PO5, PO7 3 0 0 3.0

11E703 VLSI Design PEO1 PO5, PO7 3 0 0 3.0

11E704 Utilization and Conservation of

Electrical Energy PEO1 PO5, PO7

3

0

0

3.0

Elective III 3 0 0 3.0

Elective IV 3 0 0 3.0

11E707 Power System Simulation Laboratory

PEO1 PO4, PO6, PO12

0

0

3

1.5

11E708

Electric Drives and Control

Laboratory

PEO1 PO3, PO4,

PO5

0

0

3

1.5

11E709 Project Work Phase I PEO1,2,3 PO7, PO9

PO10

0

0 6 3.0

Total 17 0 12

23.02

Eighth Semester

Code No.

Course

Objectives &

Outcomes

L

T

P

C

PEOs POs

11O801 Professional Ethics* PEO2 PO7, PO8 3 0 0 3.

0 Elective V 3 0 0 3.0 Elective VI 3 0 0 3.0 11E804 Project Work Phase II PEO1,2,

3

PO7, PO9

PO10

0

0 24 12.0

Total 9 0 24

21.02

* Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech 2

Minimum credits to be earned. The maximum number of credits as well as the total number of L T P

hours may vary depending upon the electives oftened



xviii

ELECTIVES

LANGUAGE ELECTIVES I

L T P C

11O10B Basic English I 3 0 0 3.0

11O10C Communication English 3 0 0 3.0

LANGUAGE ELECTIVES II

11O20B Basic English II 3 1 0 3.5

11O20C Advanced Communicative English 3 1 0 3.5

11O20G German 3 1 0 3.5

11O20H Hindi 3 1 0 3.5

11O20J Japanese 3 1 0 3.5

11O20F French 3 1 0 3.5

DISCIPLINE ELECTIVES

POWER ELECTRONICS

11E001 Advanced Power Semiconductor Devices 3 0 0 3.0

11E002 Microcontroller Based System Design 3 0 0 3.0

11E003 Switched Mode Power Converter 3 0 0 3.0

11E004 Power Electronic Interfaces for Renewable

Energy Sources of Power Generation

3

0

0

3.0

11E005 Power Electronics Applications to Power System 3 0 0 3.0

POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING

11E006 Computer Aided Analysis & Design

of Systems

3 0 0 3.0

11E007 Flexible AC Transmission Systems 3 0 0 3.0

11E008 Power System Stability 3 0 0 3.0

11E009 High Voltage Engineering 3 0 0 3.0

11E010 Energy Auditing Conservation and

Management

3

0

0

3.0

11E011 Power Quality Problems and Solutions 3 0 0 3.0

INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS

11E012 Virtual Instrumentation 3 0 0 3.0

11E013 Illumination Engineering 3 0 0 3.0

11E014 Industrial Psychology and Safety 3 0 0 3.0



xix

11E015 Bio Medical Instrumentation 3 0 0 3.0

11E016 Value Engineering 3 0 0 3.0

11E017 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3.0

11E018 PLC and Automation 3 0 0 3.0

11E019 Power Plant Instrumentation and Control 3 0 0 3.0

11E020 Automotive Electronics 3 0 0 3.0

11E021 Bio Medical Signal Processing 3 0 0 3.0

11E022 Process Control Instrumentation 3 0 0 3.0

11E023 Communication Engineering 3 0 0 3.0

11E024 Computer networks 3 0 0 3.0

11O008 Organizational Behavior and Management 3 0 0 3.0

EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

11E025 Advanced Control Engineering 3 0 0 3.0

11E026 Digital Control System 3 0 0 3.0

11E027 Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic Control 3 0 0 3.0

11E028 Embedded Controller Applications in

Power Electronics

3

0

0

3.0

11E029 Artificial Intelligence & Expert Systems 3 0 0 3.0

11E030 Signals and Systems 2 0 0 2.0

11E031 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3.0

PHYSICS ELECTIVES

11O0PA Nano Science and Technology 3 0 0 3.0

11O0PB Laser Technology 3 0 0 3.0

11O0PC Electro Optic Materials 3 0 0 3.0

11O0PD Vacuum Science and Deposition

Techniques

3

0

0

3.0

11O0PE Semi conducting Materials and

Devices

3

0

0

3.0

CHEMISTRY ELECTIVES

11O0YA

11O0YB

Polymer Chemistry and Processing

Energy Storing Devices and

3 0 0 3.0

Fuel Cells 3 0 0 3.0

11O0YC Chemistry of Nano materials 3 0 0 3.0

11O0YD Corrosion Science and Engineering 3 0 0 3.0

Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech. | Regulation 2011 xx


ENTREPRENEURSHIP ELECTIVES♦

11O001 Entrepreneurship Development I 3 0 0 3.0

11O002 Entrepreneurship Development II€ 3 0 0 3.0

ONE CREDIT COURSES*

11E0XA 11E0XB

Electro Magnetic Compatibility Embedded Controllers

- - - 1.0 - - - 1.0

11E0XC 11E0XD

Real Time Operating Systems Micro Electro Mechanical Systems

- - - 1.0 - - - 1.0

11E0XE 11E0XF

Nano Electro Mechanical Systems Protocol Development

- - - 1.0 - - - 1.0

11E0XG 11E0XH

Wireless Sensor Networks Variable Frequency Drives

- - - 1.0 - - - 1.0

11E0XI 11E0XJ

Photo voltaic solar system Synchronous Generator – Industrial Practices

- - - 1.0 - - - 1.0

11E0XK

Practical Aspects Of Var Control And Energy Storage Devices SOLAR POWER PLANT DESIGN

- - - 1.0

11E0XL 11E0XM

Solar power plant design Smart grid technologies

- - - 1.0 - - - 1.0

11E0XN 11E0XO

Power Plant Engineering – Study & Design Wind Energy Conversion System

- - - 1.0 - - - 1.0

11E0XP 11E0XQ

Power Quality Distributed Generation and its Impacts

- - - 1.0 - - - 1.0

11E0XR 11E0XS

Power System Protection and Relay Coordination Power System Planning

- - - 1.0 - - - 1.0

SPECIAL COURSES

11E0RA Power Converters for New

11E0RB

Renewable Energy Applications

Emerging Trends in Power

- - - 3.0

Conversion Technology - - - 3.0

♦ Entrepreneurship electives will be offered only during V and VI Semesters €

Prerequest for this course is Entrepreneurship Development I

* Classes to be conducted for 20 hours duration

11O101 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I

(Common to all Branches)

Objectives

3 1 0 3.5

• Acquire knowledge in matrix theory, a part of linear algebra, which has wider application in engineering problems.

• To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their convergence so that the students will be familiar

with infinite series approximations for solutions arising in mathematical modelling and to solve first and higher order

differential equations and to use Laplace transform to solve differential equations using only algebraic operations.

Programme Outcome

PO1: An ability to apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an engineering

specialization to the solution of complex Electrical and Electronics engineering problem.

PO2: An ability to identify, formulate, research literature, and analyze complex engineering problems reaching

substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences and engineering sciences

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to

1. Acquire wholesome knowledge in basic concepts of engineering mathematics.

2. Improve problem evaluation technique.

3. Choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem

Prerequsite Require Knowledge on Basic Mathematics from schooling.

Assessment pattern

S. No

Test Ii

Test II1

Model Examination1

Semester End

Examination

1 Remember 20 20 20 20 2 Understand 20 20 20 20 3 Apply 30 30 30 30 4 Analyze/ Evaluate 30 30 30 30 5 Create - - - - Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Matrices

Characteristic equation - eigen values and eigen vectors of a real matrix - properties of eigen values - Cayley–Hamilton theorem- Reduction of a real matrix to a diagonal form- Orthogonal matrices- Quadratic form -Reduction of a quadratic form to a canonical

form by orthogonal transformation-application to engineering problems.

9 Hours Unit II

Series and Differential Calculus Series- Convergences and divergence- Comparison test– Ratio test - Curvature in Cartesian Coordinates- Centre and radius of

curvature - Circle of curvature – Evolutes –Envelopes – application to engineering problems.

9 Hours

Unit III

Differential Equation of First Order Linear differential equation of first order-exact-integrating factor- Euler’s equation-Bernoulli’s-modeling-application to engineering

problems.

9 Hours

2

Unit IV

Differential Equations of Higher Order Linear differential equations of second and higher order with constant and variablecoefficients - Cauchy’s and Legendre’s linear

differential equations - method of variation of parameters –application of engineering problems.

9Hours

Unit V

Laplace Transforms Laplace Transform- conditions for existence(statement only) -Transforms of standard functions – properties (statement only) - Transforms of derivatives and integrals - Initial and Final value theorems (statement only) - Periodic functions - Inverse transforms -

Convolution theorems(statement only) - Applications of Laplace transforms for solving the ordinary differential equations up to

second order with constant coefficients-application to engineering problems.

Text Book(s)

1. B S Grewal ., Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Delhi, 2000.

9 Hours Total:45+15 Hours

2. K A Lakshminarayanan ,K.Megalai, P.Geetha and D.Jayanthi ,Mathematics for Engineers, Volume I, Vikas Publishing

House, New Delhi, 2008.

Reference Book(s) 1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volume I, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi,

2009.

2. T. Vegetarian , Engineering Mathematics , Tata McGraw Hill Publications , New Delhi, 2008.

3. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 8th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Singapore, 2008.

4. C. RayWylie and C. Louis. Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd,

2003.

Objectives

11O102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS

(Common to all branches)

3 0 0 3.0

• To impart fundamental knowledge in the areas of acoustics, crystallography and new engineering materials.

• To apply fundamental knowledge in the area of LASERS and fiber optics

• To use the principles of quantum physics in the respective fields

• At the end of the course the students are familiar with the basic principles and applications of physics in

various fields. Program Outcome





Course Outcomes


1. Develop applications for real world problems such as designing acoustic buildings and study the basics and

applications of crystal physics.

2. Analyze the applications of applied optics.

3. Expand their knowledge towards new engineering materials such as metallic glasses, ceramics, shape memory

alloys, bio materials and nanomaterials.

Prerequsite Require Knowledge on physics from schooling

Assessment Pattern

S.No

Test 1∗

Test 2∗

Model Examination∗

Semester

End Examination

1 Remember 20 20 20 20 2 Understand 20 20 20 20 3 Apply 25 25 25 25 4 Analyze 25 25 20 20 5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15 6 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I Acoustics and Ultrasonics Acoustics: Classification of sound – characteristics of musical sound – loudness – Weber – Fechner law – decibel – absorption coefficient – reverberation – reverberation time – Sabine’s formula (growth & decay). Factors affecting

acoustics of buildings and their remedies. Ultrasonics: Ultrasonic production – magnetostriction - piezo electric methods.

Applications: Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves (acoustic grating) - SONAR.

The phenomenon of cavitation. 9 Hours

Unit II

Crystallography Crystal Physics: Lattice – unit cell – Bravais lattices – lattice planes – Miller indices – ‘d’ spacing in cubic lattice –

calculation of number of atoms per unit cell – atomic radius – coordination number – packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures - X-ray Diffraction: Laue’s method – powder crystal method.

Crystal defects. 9 Hours

4

Unit III

Waveoptics Interference: Air wedge – theory – uses – testing of flat surfaces – thickness of a thin wire. LASER: Types of lasers

– Nd – YAG laser – CO2 laser – semiconductor laser (homojunction). Applications: Holography – construction –

reconstruction – uses. Fiber Optics: Principle of light transmission through fiber - expression for acceptance angle and numerical aperture - types of optical fibers (refractive Index profile, mode) fiber optic communication system (block diagram only) Laser gas sensors. 9 Hours

Unit IV Modern Physics Quantum Physics: Development of quantum theory – de Broglie wavelength – Schrödinger’s wave equation – time

dependent – time independent wave equations – physical significance – applications – particle in a box (1d). X-rays: Scattering of X-rays – Compton Effect – theory and experimental verification.

Degenerate and non degenerate. 9 Hours

Unit V

New Engineering Materials Metallic glasses: Manufacturing – properties – uses. Shape Memory Alloys: Working principle – shape memor y effect – applications. Nanomaterials: Preparation method – sol gel technique – mechanical – magnetic characteristics – uses. Ceramics: Manufacturing methods – slip casting – isostatic pressing – thermal and electrical

properties - uses.

Carbon nano tubes and applications 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook(s) 1. V.Rajendran, Engineering Physics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011.2. P. K. Palanisami, Physics for Eng-

-ineers, Vol. 1, Scitech Pub. (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2002 2. P. K. Palanisami, Physics for Engineers, Vol. 1, Scitech Pub. (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai,

2002.

Reference(s)

1. M. N. Avadhanulu and P. G. Kshirsagar, A Textbook of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company Ltd

,New Delhi, 2005 2. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publication, New Delhi, 2006. 3. V. Rajendran and A. Marikani, Physics I, TMH, New Delhi, 2004.

4. Arthur Beiser, Concepts of Modern Physics, TMH, 2008.

5. R. K. Gaur and S. L. Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Rai Publishers, New Delhi, 2006

S.No

Test I∗

Test II∗

Ex Model

on

Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 10 10

2 Understand 20 20 20 20

3 Apply 30 30 30 30

4 Analyze 20 20 20 20

5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20

6 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Objective

11O103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY


3 0 0 3.0

• Imparting knowledge on the principles of water characterization, treatment methods and

industrial applications.

• Understanding the principles and application of electrochemistry and corrosion science.

• Basic information and application of polymer chemistry, nanotechnology and analytical techniques

Program Outcome





Course Outcomes


1. Understand the disadvantages of using hard water domestically and select appropriate treatment methods

2. Analyze the concept, causes and control measures of corrosion

3. Evaluate the importance of polymers and nanomaterials in day to day life

Prerequsite

Require Knowledge on chemistry from schooling

Assessment Pattern

aminati ∗

Examination

Unit I

Chemistry of Water and its Industrial Applications

Hardness of water: Equivalents of calcium carbonate - Units of hardness - Degree of hardness and its estimation (EDTA method) - Numerical problems on degree of hardness - pH value of water. Use of water for industrial purposes:

Boiler feed water-scale-sludge - caustic embrittlement. Softening of hard water: External conditioning – zeolite - ion

exchange methods - internal conditioning – calgon - phosphate methods. Desalination: Reverse osmosis- electrodialysis.

Use of water for domestic purposes: Domestic water treatment - Disinfection of water - break point chlorination. Characterization of your campus water. 9 Hours

Unit II

Electrochemistry for Materials Processing Introduction – emf - Single electrode potential - Hydrogen electrode - Calomel electrode - Glass electrode - pH measurement using glass electrode - Electrochemical series. Cells: Electrochemical cells – Cell reactions- Daniel cell – Reversible cells and irreversible cells - Difference between electrolytic cells and electrochemical cells. Concept of

electroplating: Electroplating of gold - electroless plating (Nickel). Batteries: Secondary batteries - lead acid, nickel - cadmium and lithium batteries. Fuel cell: Hydrogen - oxygen fuel cell.

6

Electricity assisted painting. 9 Hours

Unit III

Chemistry of Corrosion and its Control

Corrosion: Mechanism of corrosion- – Chemical and electrochemical - Pilling-Bedworth rule - Oxygen absorption – Hydrogen evolution - Galvanic series. Types of corrosion: Galvanic corrosion - Differential aeration corrosion - Examples -

Factors influencing corrosion. Methods of corrosion control: Sacrificial anodic protection - Impressed current method.

Protective coatings: Paints - Constituents and Functions. Special paints: Fire retardant - Water repellant paints.

Applications of vapour phase inhibitors. 9 Hours

Unit IV

Introduction to Polymer and Nanotechnology Polymers: Monomer - functionality - Degree of polymerization - Classification based on source - applications.

Types of polymerization: Addition, condensation and copolymerization. Mechanism of free radical polymerization. Thermoplastic and thermosetting plastics - Preparation, properties and applications: Epoxy resins, TEFLON, nylon and

bakelite. Compounding of plastics. Moulding methods: Injection and extrusion. Nanomaterials: Introduction –

Nanoelectrodes - Carbon nanotubes - Nanopolymers - Application.

A detailed survey on application of polymer in day to day life. 9 Hours

UNIT V

Instrumental Techniques of Chemical Analysis Beer – Lambert’s law - Problems. UV visible and IR spectroscopy: Principle- Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Applications. Colorimetry: Principle – Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of iron by colorimetry. Flame photometry: Principle - Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of sodium by flame photometry. Atomic

absorption spectroscopy: Principle - Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of nickel by atomic absorption

spectroscopy.

Applications of analytical instruments in medical field.

Textbook(s)

1. P. C. Jain and M. Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications., New Delhi, 2009.

2. R. Sivakumar and N. Sivakumar, Engineering Chemistry, TMH, New Delhi, 2009.

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

3. B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma and Madan S. Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, Shoban Lal Nagin

Chand & Co., 2005

Reference(s) 1. Sashi Chawla, Text Book of Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi, 2003. 2. B. S. Bahl, G. D. Tuli and Arun Bahl, Essentials of Physical Chemistry, S. Chand & Company, 2008. 3. J. C. Kuriacose and J. Rajaram, Chemistry in Engineering & Technology, Vol. 1&2, TMH, 2009.

4. C. P. Poole Jr., J. F. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley India Private Limited, 2007.

5. Andre Arsenault and Geoffrey A. Ozin, Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nanomaterials, Royal

Society of Chemistry, London, 2005. 6. D. A. Skoog, D. M. West, F. James Holler &S. R. Crouch, Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry, Wiley,

2004.

11E105 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS-I

3 1 0 3.5

Objectives

• To understand about the network elements, types of networks, network topology

• To understand about the analysis complex circuits using Mesh current & Nodal voltage method

• To gain knowledge about the solution method of DC circuits

• To understand about the Star Delta transformation and network theorems

• To get an insight into solution of RLC circuits and analysis of coupled circuits

Program outcomes

PO1: Ability to apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an

engineering specialization to the solution of complex Electrical and Electronics engineering problem.

Course Outcomes

PO2: Ability to identify, formulate, research literature, and analyze complex engineering problems

reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences and

engineering sciences.


1. Identification of network theorems for solution of linear networks and circuits.

2. Categorizing the behaviour of non linear circuits.

3. Implementing the mathematical concepts in linear and non linear circuits

Prerequsite

Require Knowledge on physics

Assessment Pattern

S. No. Test I† Test II

† Model

Examination†

Semester End

Examination 1 Remember 10 10 10 10 2 Understand 20 20 20 20

3 Apply 30 30 30 30 4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40 5 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introductory Circuit Analysis Independent and dependent voltage and current sources – Source transformation- Solutions of resistive circuits with

dependents sources – Mesh and nodal analysis - Nodal conductance matrix and mesh resistance matrix- Concept of

linear circuits.

Power in parallel circuit 9 Hours

Unit II

Network Theorems

Star Delta Transformation – Superposition theorem – Thevenin’s theorem – Norton’s theorem – Reciprocity theorem - Substitution theorem – Tellegen’s theorem – Millman’s theorem – Maximum power transfer theorem.

Application of network Theorem 9 Hours

Unit III

Electrostatics Capacitance – Parallel plate capacitor – Capacitors in series and parallel – Charging and discharging of capacitor – Energy stored in electrostatic fields – Potential gradient – Dielectric strength.

8

Energy stored in capacitor 9 Hours

Unit IV

Coupled Circuits Coupled circuits – Self and mutual inductance – Inductances in series and parallel – Mutual and leakage flux – Coefficient of Coupling – Ideal Transformers - Dot convention.

Mutual Inductance 9 Hours

Unit V

Transients Time domain analysis of circuits – Linear differential equations for series and parallel RL, RC and RLC Circuits –

Transient response – Time Constant – Rise and fall times.

Series resonance of RLC circuits 9 Hours

Total: 45+15 Hours Textbook(s)

1. A. Sudhakar and S. P. Shyam Mohan, Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.

Reference(s)

1. William H.Hayt Jr, Jack E.Kemmerly, and Steven M.Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2002.

2. Joseph A.Edminister, Mahmood Nahvi, Electric Circuits, Schaum’s Series, Tata McGraw- Hill, New Delhi

2001.

3. S. P. Eugene Xavier, Electric Circuit Analysis, New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, 2003.

4. Ravish R.Singh, Electrical Networks, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

11E106 “C” PROGRAMMING 2 0 2 3.0

Objectives

• To develop the basic programming skills

• To understand the basic concepts of arrays and pointers

• To implement file concepts and operations

Program Outcomes

PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments,

analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions

Course outcomes On completion of this course, the student will be able to

1. Analyze the operator’s decision control statement, loop control and expressions in the C language.

2. Work with strings and standard functions pointers functions in the C language. 3. Write a program using Structure Union and files.

Prerequsite

Require Knowledge basic knowledge on computer science.

Assessment Pattern


† Model

Examination†

Semester End


3 Apply 20 20 20 20 4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40 5 Create 10 10 10 10

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Fundamentals of C

Histor y of C - Importance of C - Basic structure of C programs-Programming style - Executing a C program - Character set - C tokens - Keywords and identifiers - Constants (Declaration, Definition)-Variables (Declaration) -

Data types.

Unit II

Operators and Expressions

6 Hours

Arithmetic operators - Relational operators - Logical operators -Assignment operator - Increment and decrement operator

- Conditional operator - Bitwise operator - Arithmetic expressions -Evaluation of expressions - operator precedence -

Managing I/O operations.

Unit III

Branching and Looping

6 Hours

Decision making - IF statement – IF – ELSE - Nested IF - ELSE, ELSE -IF Ladder - Switch statement - GOTO

statement – operator - While statement - DO statement - FOR statement - Jumps in loops.

Unit IV

Arrays and Strings

6 Hours

One dimensional, two dimensional, multi dimensional arrays -Initialization and declaration - Dynamic arrays – Strings – Declaring –Initializing – Reading - Writing strings - Arithmetic operations on characters - string

comparison - string handling functions.

Unit V

Function

s,

10

Structures and Pointers 6 Hours User defined function – Declaration - Definition of function - function calls - category of functions - Nesting of

functions – Recursion –Structures - Definition, Declaration, Accessing structure members – Pointers - Declaration, Initialization and Accessing.

6 Hours

Total: 30 Hours Lab Component

1. Simple C programs. 2. Program using operators and expressions. 3. Programs to implement Looping and decision statements.

4. Write a C program to copy the content of one array into another array in reverse order. 5. Write a C program to reverse a string and check whether the string is a palindrome or not. 6. Write a C program to illustrate the concept of Call by Value and Call by Reference. 7. Write a C Program with recursion function.

8. Simple programs using structures and pointers

Text Book(s)

1. E. Balagurusamy, Programming in ANSI C, Tata Mc Graw Hill,2007

Total: 30 Hours

Total: 30 +30 Hours

Reference(s) 1. Behrouz A.Forouzan and Richard F. Gilberg, Computer Science: A Structure program approach using

C, Cengage learning –India edition. 2008

2. Ritchie D.M, Kernighan B.W, C Programming Language, PHI, 2000.

11E107 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• Understand the theory of semiconductor & PN junction diode

• Know the basics of BJT & FET operation

• Gain a thorough understanding of operation & characteristics of SCR, TRIAC & DIAC, UJT, PUT & various photo conductive devices

Program Outcomes

PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and

interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions

PO5 : An ability to create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering tools including

prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations


1. Understand semiconductor devices, rectifiers and Power supplies.

2. Know abou t BJT , FET and UJT .

3. Discuss the fundamental applications of photodiodes, solar cells, and light-emitting diodes.

Prerequsite Require basic knowledge on semiconductor devices

Assessment Pattern

S.No

Test I†

Test II†

Model

Examination†

Semester End

Examination

Remember 10 10 10 10


3 Apply 20 20 20 20

4 Analyze / Evaluate 50 50 50 50

5 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

.

Unit – I

Rectifiers and Power Supply Circuits Half wave and full wave rectifier analysis - Inductor filter – Capacitor filter – Series voltage regulator – Switched

mode power supply.

capacitor filter 9 Hours

Unit – II

Semiconductor Devices

Theory of P-N junction – P-N junction as diode – P-N diode currents – Volt-Ampere characteristics – Diode resistance – Temperature effect on P-N junction – Transition and diffusion capacitance of P-N diode – Diode

switching times.

Junction capacitance 9 Hours

Unit – III

Bi-Polar Transistor Junction transistor – Transistor construction – Detailed study of currents in transistor – Input and output characteristics of CE, CB and CC configurations – Transistor hybrid model for CE configuration – Analysis based on h

12

parameters– Transistor ratings.

h-parameters 9 Hours

Unit – IV

Field Effect Transistors and UJT Junction Field Effect Transistor – Pinch off voltage – JFET Volt-Ampere characteristics – JFET small signal model

– MOSFETS and their characteristics – FET as a variable resistor – FET as an Amplifier – UJT – UJT oscillator.

Applications of MOSFET 9 Hours

Unit – V

Optoelectronic Devices Photo emissive and photo electric theory – Construction and working of: Light emitting diodes, liquid crystal cell, seven segment display, photo conductive cell, photo diode, solar cell, photo transistor, opto couplers, LDR, LCD and laser diode.

Solar cell applications 9 Hours Total: 45 Hours

Textbook(s)

1. Jacob. Millman, Christos C.Halkias, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Limited, New Delhi, 3rd Edition 2010.

2. N.P.Deshpande, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Limited, New Delhi, 1st

Edition 2007

Reference(s)

1. David A.Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2003.

2. Theodre. F. Boghert, “Electronic Devices & Circuits”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003

3. Ben G. Streetman and Sanjay Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices”, Pearson Education, 2002.

4. Allen Mottershead, “Electronic Devices and Circuits – An Introduction”, Prentice Hall of India Private

Limited, New Delhi, 2003.

Objectives

11O208 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS

Common for CE,EEE,ME,BT,IT & TT (I Semester); AE,CSE,ECE,EIE & FT (II Semester)

2 0 2 3.0

• Upon Successful completion of this course, the student should be able to:

• Understand and appreciate the importance of Engineering Graphics in Engineering

• Understand the basic principles of Technical/Engineering Drawing

• Understand the different steps in producing drawings according to BIS conventions

Program Outcome PO3: An ability to design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or processes that

meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, cultural, societal and

environmental considerations.


prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations Course outcomes


1. Projection of various components 2. Interpretation of technical drawings and detailing

3. Familiarize with the basis structure and content of engineering drawing

Prerequsite Require basic knowledge on Engineering Drawing

Assessment Pattern

Internal Assessment Semester End Examination

Preparation 10 15

Observation and Results 15 25

Record 10 -

Mini-project/ Model examination/ Viva-voce

15

10

Total 50 50

Unit I Concepts and Conventions

Use of drafting instruments – BIS conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and dimensioning. General principles of orthographic projection – First angle projection – Layout of views

– Projection of points, located in all quadrant and straight lines located in the first quadrant – Determination of true

lengths and true inclinations.

Conics: Different types and applications – Construction by Eccentricity method.

Unit II

Projections of Solids

6 Hours

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one reference plane

by change of position method.

Projection of Planes inclined to any one reference plane.

Unit III

Sections of Solids and Development of Surfaces

6 Hours

Sectioning of solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one Reference: plane – Obtaining the true shape of section. Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids – prisms,

pyramids, cylinders and cones.

14

Intersection of Solids.

6 hours

Unit IV

Isometric Projection and Perspective Projection Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale – isometric projections of simple solids, pyramids, cylinders and

cones. Orthographic projection - Systems of orthographic projection - First angle orthographic projection - Conversion of pictorial to orthographic views (Free hand).

Perspective projections: Perspective projection of solids by vanishing point method. 6 Hours

Unit V

Introduction to AutoCAD and 2D Modelling Starting AutoCAD – Interfaces – Menus – Tool bars – Coordinates – Limits – Units – 2D commands – Drawing Commands - Creating a Point, Construction of Lines, Polyline, Multiline, Circles, Arcs, Rectangle, Polygon,

Ellipse, Hatch, Text, Mtext, Linetypes – Edit and Modify commands - Copy, Move, Erase, Mirror, Zoom, Pan,

Arrays, Trim, Break, Fillet, Chamfer, Redraw, Regen, Dimensioning, Colors, Layers – Exercises.

Introduction to 3D modeling.

Textbook(s)

6

6 Hours

Total: 30 Hours

1. K. V. Natarajan, A Textbook: of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2006.

Reference(s)

1. S. Julyes Jaisingh, Engineering Graphics, Tri Sea Publishers, 2010 2. V. Rameshbabu, Engineering Graphics, VRB Publishers Pvt Ltd., 2009. 3. K. Venugopal, Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2002.

4. Narayana and P. Kannaiah, Engineering Graphics, Scitech Publications (Pvt) Limited-2002

List of Experiments

1. Projection of points located in all quadrants. 2. Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant inclined to both the planes.

3. Determination of true lengths and true inclinations of Straight lines.

4. Projection of Solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one reference

plane by change of position method.

5. Sectioning of solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one reference plane and

obtaining true shape of section.

6. Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids like prisms, pyramids cylinder and cone. 7. Isometric Projections / Views of Solids like prisms, pyramids and Cylinders. 8. Orthographic Projection of various components from pictorial views.

9. Drawing of front, top and side views from given pictorial views using AutoCAD.

10. Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid and cylinder using AutoCAD.

Total: 30 Hours

Total: 30+30 Hours

Practical Schedule

Sl.

No Experiment Hours

1 Projection of points located in all quadrants 3

2 Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant inclined to both the

planes.

3

3 Determination of true lengths and true inclinations of Straight lines 3

4 Projection of Solids when the axis is inclined to one reference plane by change of position method.

3

5 Sectioning of solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one reference plane and obtaining true shape of section

3

6 Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids. 3 7 Isometric Projections / Views of Solids like prisms, pyramids and Cylinders. 3 8 Orthographic Projection of various components from pictorial views. 3 9 Drawing of front, top and side views from given pictorial views using

AutoCAD.

3

10 Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid and cylinder using AutoCAD. 3

11E209 WORKSHOP PRACTICE (Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech)

0 0 2 1.0

16

Objectives

• To learn the use of need for safety in work place

• To learn the use of basic hand tools

• To gain hands on experience on Carpentry, Fitting, Sheet metal, Plumbing, Arc welding, Foundry and Basic electrical circuits

• To have the basic knowledge on working of domestic appliances

Program Outcomes

PO3: An ability to design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system

components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for

the public health and safety, cultural, societal and environmental considerations.

PO5 : An ability to create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern

engineering tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities

with an understanding of the limitations Course outcomes


1. Understand the practical difficulties encountered in industries during any assembly work 2. Do simple electronic and electrical work throughout their carrier.

3. Rectify simple problem connected with pipe fittings

Prerequsite Require basic knowledge on cutting, welding, Wiring

Assessment pattern

Internal Assessment Semester End Examination

Preparation 10 20 Observation and Results 10 10

Record 10 - Mini-Project/

Model Examination / Viva-Voce

20

20

Total 50 50

List of Experiments(Common for all branches)

1. Forming of simple objects using sheet metal

2. Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat

3. Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump

4. Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints 5. Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, wooden box, cell phone stand etc., by using power

tools 6. Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps.

7. Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Machine/ Refrigerator and Window Air-

Conditioner 8. Study of electrical accessories, Indian electricity rules, tool, materials and safety precautions

used in domestic wiring. 9. Study of PCB fabrication methods 10 .Transformer oil testing 11. Measurement of earth resistance using megger

12. Staircase wiring

30 Hours

Practical Schedule

Total: 30+30 Hours

SI. No. Experiment Hours

1 Forming of simple objects using sheet metal. 3

2 Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat. 3

3 Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump. 2

4 Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints.

3

5 Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, cell phone stand etc., by using power tools.

2

6 Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps.

2

7 Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Washing Machine/

Refrigerator and Window Air-Conditioner.

2

8 Study of electrical accessories, Indian electricity rules, tool, materials and

safety precautions used in domestic wiring.

2

9 Study of PCB fabrication methods 2

10 Transformer oil testing 3

11 Measurement of earth resistance using megger 3

12 Staircase wiring 3

18

11O201 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II (Common to all branches) 3 1 0 3.5

Objectives

• Acquire knowledge to use multiple integrals to find area and volume of surface and solids respectively.

• Have a good grasp of analytic functions, complex integration and their interesting properties and its applications.

Programme Outcome





Course Outcomes


1. Acquire knowledge in basic concept of engineering mathematics.

2. Improvement in problem evaluation technique.

3. Choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem. Prerequsite Require basic knowledge on Engineering Mathematics I

Assessment pattern

S. No

Test Iii

Test II1

Model Examination1

Semester End

Examination

1 Remember 20 20 20 20


3 Apply 30 30 30 30 4 Analyze/ Evaluate 30 30 30 30 5 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I Functions of Several Variables

Functions of two variables - Partial derivatives - Total differential - Derivative of implicit functions - Maxima and

minima - Constrained Maxima and Minima by Lagrangian Multiplier method - Jacobians-application to

engineering problems. 9 Hours

Unit II

Multiple Integrals Double integration in cartesian and polar co-ordinates - Change of order of integration - change of variables- Area and volume by multiple integrals- application to engineering problems. 9 Hours

Unit III

Vector Calculus Gradient - divergence - curl- line - surface and volume integrals - Green’s - Gauss divergence and Stokes’

theorems (statement only) - applications to engineering problems.

9 Hours

Unit IV

Analytic Functions Analytic functions- Necessary condition of analytic function-Sufficient condition of analytic function(statement

only)- properties - Determination of analytic function using Milne Thomson’s method, conformal mappings -

Mappings of w= z + a, az, 1/z, ez- bilinear transformation -- application to engineering problems.

9 Hours

Unit V

Complex Integration Cauchy’s fundamental theorem (statement only)- and application of Cauchy’s integral formula(statement only) – Taylor’s

and Laurent’s series- classification of singularities – Cauchy’s residue theorem (statement only) – Contour integration -

circular and semi circular contours (excluding poles on the real axis)- application to engineering problems

9 Hours

Textbook(s)

Total: 45+15 Hours

1. B. S. Grewal , Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Delhi, 2000.

2. K .A. Lakshminarayanan ,K. Megalai, P. Geetha and D. Jayanthi , Mathematics for Engineers, Volume II, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 2008.

Reference(s)

1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volume II, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi, 2009.

2. T. Veerarajan, Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2008. 3. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Singapore, 2008.

4. C. RayWylie and Louis .C. Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill

Publications, 2003.

20

11O202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE

(Common to all branches) 3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• Imparting knowledge on principles of environmental science and engineering.

• Understanding the concepts of ecosystem, biodiversity and impact of environmental pollution.

• Awareness on value education, population and social issues.

Program Outcome

PO3: An ability to design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or processes that



Course Outcomes On completion of this course, the student will be able to

1. Be aware of the role of professionals in protecting the environment from degradation.

2. Understand current environmental challenges like pollution and its management

3. Recognize the impact of population growth and the role of value education

Prerequsite Require basic knowledge on Basic civil engineering.

Assessment Pattern

S.No.

Test I∗

Test II∗

Model

Examination∗

Semester

End

Examination 1 Remember 20 20 15 15


3 Apply 25 25 20 20

4 Analyze 25 25 25 25

5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20

6 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction to Environmental Studies and Natural Resources

Environment: Definition- scope - importance – need for public awareness. Forest resources: Use –over exploitation-

deforestation - case studies- mining - effects on forests and tribal people. Water resources: Use – over utilization of

surface and ground water- floods – drought - conflicts over water. Mineral resources: Use – exploitation -

environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources - case studies. Food resources: World food problems

- changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing - effects of modern agriculture- fertilizer-pesticide problems - water

logging - salinity -case studies. Energy resources: Growing energy needs - renewable and non renewable energy sources.

Land resources: Land as a resource - land degradation - soil erosion. Role of an individual in conservation

of natural resources.

Documentation of the effect of degradation of forest resource.

Unit II Ecosystems and Biodiversity

9 Hours

Concept of an ecosystem: Structure and function of an ecosystem – producers - consumers -decomposers – energyflow in

the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains - food webs and ecological pyramids. Types of ecosystem:

Introduction - characteristic features - forest ecosystem - grassland ecosystem - desert ecosystem - aquatic

ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries). Biodiversity: Introduction– definition (genetic - species –

ecosystem) diversity. Value of biodiversity: Consumptive use - productive use – social values – ethical values - aesthetic

values. Biodiversity level: Global - national - local levels- India as a mega diversity nation-

hotspots of biodiversity. Threats to biodiversity: Habitat loss - poaching of wildlife – man wildlife conflicts – endangered

and endemic species of India. Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of

biodiversity - field study.

Documentation of the endangered flora and fauna in your native place.

Unit III

Environmental Pollution

9 Hours

Pollution: Definition –air pollution - water pollution - soil pollution - marine pollution - noise pollution - thermal

pollution - nuclear hazards. Solid waste management: Causes - effects - control measures of urban and industrial wastes.

Role of an individual in prevention of pollution - pollution case studies. Disaster management: Floods – earthquake -

cyclone - landslides. Electronic wastes.

Investigation on the pollution status of Bhavani river. 9Hours

Unit IV

Social Issues and Environment

Sustainable development : Unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy. Water

conservation - rain water harvesting - watershed management. Resettlement and rehabilitation of people.

Environmental ethics: Issues - possible solutions – climate change - global warming and its effects on flora and fauna

- acid rain - ozone layer depletion - nuclear accidents - nuclear holocaust - wasteland reclamation - consumerism and

waste products. Environment protection act: Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) act – water (Prevention and control

of Pollution) act – wildlife protection act – forest conservation act – issues involved in enforcement of environmental

legislation

Analyze the recent steps taken by government of India to prevent pollution. 9 Hours

Unit V

Human Population and Environment

Human population: Population growth - variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare

programme and family planning – environment and human health – Human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS,

Swine flu – women and child welfare . Role of information technology in environment and human health.

Population explosion in India, China – the present and future scenario.

Textbook(s)

1. T. G. Jr. Miller, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co., 2004.

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

22

2. Raman Sivakumar, Introduction to Environmental Science and Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Education

Private Limited, New Delhi, 2010.

Reference(s)

1. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad India, 2010 .

2. S. Divan, Environmental Law and Policy in India, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2001.

3. K. D. Wager, Environmental Management, W. B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA, 1998.

4. W. P. Cunningham, Environmental Encyclopedia, Jaico Publising House, Mumbai, 2004.

5. S. K. Garg, R. Garg, R. Garg, Ecological & Environmental Studies, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2006.

6. http://www.ipcc.ch/index.html

7. http://unfccc.int/2860.php

Objectives

11E204 M A T E R I A L SCIENCE

3 0 0 3

• To explain the properties of conducting, semiconducting and dielectric materials.

• To impart fundamental knowledge in optical materials.

• To enable the students to understand the magnetic materials.

Program Outcome






1. Demonstrate magnetic and electrical properties of materials.

2. Familiarize with the basics of optoelectronic materials and their applications.

3. Identify the suitability of magnetic materials for its specific application.

Prerequsite Require basic knowledge on Engineering Physics.

Assessment Pattern

S.No

Test 1∗

Test 2∗

Model Examination∗

Semester

End

Examination 1 Remember 20 20 20 20 2 Understand 20 20 20 20 3 Apply 25 25 25 25 4 Analyze 25 25 20 20 5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15 6 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Electrical properties of Metals

Introduction - Derivation of microscopic form of Ohm’s law- postulates of classical free electron theory- derivation

of electrical conductivity of metals (Drude- Lorentz theory)- merits and demerits. Derivation of thermal conductivity – Wiedemann-Franz law- verification. Electron energies in metal and Fermi energy- Fermi-Dirac distribution

function and its variation with temperature- density of energy states- calculation of density of electron and fermi energy

at 0K- average energy of free electron at 0K- Importance of fermi energy- problems.

Quantum free electron theory and Band theory of solids.

Unit II

Semiconducting Materials & Devices

9 Hours

Introduction - elemental and compound semiconductors - Intrinsic semiconductors: density of electrons - density of holes- determination of carrier concentration and position of Fermi energy- band gap energy determination (quantitative

treatment). Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration in p-type and n-type semiconductors. Hall effect- theory of

Hall effect- experimental determination of Hall voltage- applications. Semi conducting devices: solar cells

(Photovoltaic effect) – uses. Photo detectors: pin photo diodes – applications.

Variation of Fermi level with temperature and doping concentration in extrinsic semiconductors.

Unit III

Dielectrics

9 Hours

Introduction- fundamental definitions in dielectrics- expressions for electronic, ionic and orientation polarization

mechanisms- space charge polarization- Langevin- Debye equation- frequency and temperature effects onpolarization- dielectric loss- internal field- expression for internal field (cubic structure)- derivation of Clausius- Mosotti equation –

importance. Dielectric breakdown- various breakdown mechanisms with characteristics- applications of dielectric

materials and insulating materials- problems.

Charging and discharging of capacitors.

Unit IV

Optical Materials

9 Hours

Introduction-fluorescence and phosphorescence- technique of increasing the emission time. Light Emitting Diode:

principle, construction and working-applications. Liquid crystal display: general properties- dynamic scattering

display- twisted nematic display- applications- comparison between LED and LCD. Disk data storage recording and read

out of data in CD-ROM- principle - magneto optic disk.

Various data storage and retrieval techniques.

Unit V

Magnetic Materials 9 Hours

Introduction-orbital magnetic moment and spin magnetic moment-Bohr magneton-basic definitions –properties of dia, para and ferro magnetic materials-domain theory of ferro magnetism-process of domain magnetization- reversible

and irreversible domains-explanation of hysteresis curve based on domain theory-hard and soft magnetic materials-

recording and read out process in floppy disk and magnetic bubble memor y-comparison between flopp y disk and bubble

memory-problems.

Magnetic shift register. 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

24

Textbook(s)

1. V. Rajendran, Materials Science, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2011.

2. M. Arumugam, Physics II, Anuradha Publications, Kumbakonam, 2005.

Reference(s)

1. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2006.

2. M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company Ltd.,

New Delhi, 2005.

3. P.K. Palanisami, Physics For Engineers, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 200

4. V. Raghavan, Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009.

5. M. R. Srinivasan, Physics for Engineers, Reprint, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2002.

Objectives

11O105 BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4 0 0 4

• To impart basic knowledge in the field of Civil Engineering focusing building materials, surveying,

foundation and transportation Engineering

• To impart basic knowledge in the field of Mechanical Engineering focusing on generation of power from

various natural resources and to know about various types of Boilers and Turbines used for power

generation and to understand the working of IC engines and basic manufacturing processes

Program Outcome (POs) PO3: An ability to design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or processes that




prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations Course Outcomes On completion of this course, the student will be able to

Basics of Civil Engineering

1. Acquire knowledge on various construction materials

2. Determine the major components of buildings and its functions 3. Classify the various types of roads, bridges, permanent ways and airports

Basis of Mechanical Engineering

1. Illustrate the construction and working of IC engines and refrigerators

2. Analyse the working principle of boilers, turbines and various power plants utilizing conventional and non-

conventional sources of energy

3. Investigate the manufacturing processes like casting, welding, machining operations

Basis of Mechanical Engineering

1. Illustrate the construction and working of IC engines and refrigerators

2. Analyse the working principle of boilers, turbines and various power plants utilizing conventional and non-

conventional sources of energy

3. Investigate the manufacturing processes like casting, welding, machining operations

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge on basic civil and mechanical engineering.

26

Assessment Pattern

S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy

(New Version)

Test I†

Test II† Model

Examination† Semester End


3 Apply 20 20 20 20 4 Analyze / Evaluate - - - - 5 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction to Civil Engineering Histor y, development and scope of Civil Engineering - Functions of Civil Engineers. Construction Materials:

Characteristics of good building materials such as stones - Bricks, A.C. sheets - G.I. sheets and Ceramic tiles - Timber, cement - Aggregates and concrete. Surveying: Definition and purpose – Classification – Basic principles –

Measurement of length by chains and tapes – Calculation of area of a plot – Measurement of bearings and angles using a

prismatic compass – Leveling – Contours

Application of contours 12 Hours

Unit II

General Concepts Relating to Buildings Selection of site – Basic functions of buildings – Major components of buildings. Foundations: Purpose of foundation – Bearing capacity of soils – Types of foundations. Proper methods of construction of: Brick masonry – Stone masonry – Hollow Block masonry. Beams – Lintels – Columns – Flooring – Doors and windows –

Roofing

Damp proof course – Surface finishes 12 Hours

Unit III

Transportation Engineering Classification of Highways – Cross sections of water bound macadam - Bituminous and cement concrete roads –

Traffic signs and signals. Importance of railways - Gauges – Components of a permanent way – Classification of bridges – Components of Airport

Examples of Marvelous Structures 12 Hours

Unit IV

Engineering Materials and Manufacturing Processes

Classification of Engineering materials, Mechanical properties and uses of cast iron, steel, and High Speed Steel.

Introduction to casting process, Green sand moulding - Pattern, Melting furnaces - Cupola and Electric Furnace.

Metal Forming - Forging Process. Introduction to Arc and Gas Welding. Centre Lathe - Specifications - Principal parts -

Operations - Straight turning, Step turning, Taper turning methods, Knurling, Thread cutting methods, Facing,

Boring, and Chamfering - Lathe tools and Materials. Drilling – Radial drilling machine - Specification and Operation

Milling operation 12 Hours

Unit V

Internal Combustion Engines and Refrigeration

Classification of IC engines, Main components of IC engines, working of a 4 stroke & 2 stroke petrol & diesel

engine, differences between 4 stroke and 2 stroke engine, Lubrication and Cooling systems in IC Engines.

Refrigeration: Working Principle of Vapour Compression & Vapour Absorption System, Domestic refrigerator

Domestic air conditioning

Unit VI

Alternate Sources of Energy, Power Plants and Boilers

12 Hours

Solar, Wind, Tidal, Geothermal and Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC). Power Plant: Classification of Power Plants- Steam - Nuclear, Diesel, and Hydro Power Plants. Types of Boilers – Simple Vertical, Babcock and

cox and La-Mont Boiler, Differences between fire tube and water tube boiler. Types of steam turbines- working of

asingle stage impulse and reaction turbines

Biomass and Biofuels in power generation

12 Hours Total: 60 Hours

Textbook(s)

1. M. S. Palanichamy, Basic Civil Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2009

2. G. Shanmugam & S. Ravindran, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company

Limited, New Delhi, 2010

Reference(s) 1. N. Arunachalam, Bascis of Civil Engineering, Pratheeba Publishers, 2000

2. B. K. Sarkar, Thermal Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008 3. P. N. Rao, Manufacturing Technology: Foundry, Forming and Welding, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company Limited, New Delhi, 2003.

4. S. R. J. Shantha Kumar, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Hi-tech Publications, Mayiladuthurai, 2000

5. http://www.tutorvista.co.in/content/science/science-ii/sources-energy/sources-energyindex.php

6. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-ROORKEE/MANUFACTURING-PROCESSES/

index.htm

28

11E206 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS II

Objectives 3 1 0 3.5

• To gain knowledge about the solution methods of AC and polyphase circuits

• To get an insight into solution of RLC circuits, single phase and three phase power measurements.

• To understand the concept of two port networks and S-Domain analysis.

Program Outcomes


substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences and engineering sciences.



environmental considerations


prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.


1. Analyze the single phase and poly phase circuits.

2. Compute the parameters for two port networks and resonance circuits. 3. Simulate electric circuit using PSPICE.

Prerequsite Require basic knowledge on Electric circuit analysis I

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model Examination†

Semester End

Examination

1 Remember 10 10 10 10 2 Understand 20 20 20 20 3 Apply 30 30 30 30 4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40 5 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction to Alternating Voltages and Currents Generation of AC voltages – Phase relation in pure resistor, inductor and capacitor – Power and power factor – Series

and parallel circuits – Application of network theorems to AC circuits.

Cut set and tree branch voltage

9 Hours

Unit II

Polyphase Circuits

Generation of Three phase voltages - Phase sequence – Three phase Star and delta connected sources and

loads – Three phase balanced and unbalanced circuits – Power measurement in three phase circuits using two

Wattmeter method – Neutral shift.

Methods of power measurement

9 Hours

Unit III

Resonance

Series resonant circuits – Bandwidth of an RLC circuit - Q factor and its effect on bandwidth - Parallel

resonance - Resonant frequency for a tank circuit – Locus diagram.

Tank circuit applications

9 Hours

Unit IV

Two Port Networks

Open circuit impendence (Z) parameters – Short circuit admittance (Y) parameters – h Parameters -

Transmission parameters - T and π representation – Lattice network.

Comparison pf various network parameters

9 Hours

Unit V

S-Domain Analysis Natural response and S-plane – Concept of complex frequency – Z(s) and Y(s) – Nodal and mesh analysis of

electric circuits – Poles, Zeros and Transfer function – Properties of transfer function – Necessary condition

for transfer function.

Transfer function and its importance

9 Hours

Total: 45+15 Hours

Textbook(s) 1. A. Sudhakar and S. P. Shyam Mohan, Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.

Reference(s)

1.S.P.Ghosh and A.K Chakraborty, Network Analysis and Synthesis, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009. 2.. Muhammed.H.Rashid, SPICE for Electronic Circuits using PSPICE, Prentice Hall of India, 1996.

3.William H.Hayt Jr, Jack E.Kemmerly, and Steven M.Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis,

Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2002.

4.Joseph A.Edminister, Mahmood Nahvi, Electric Circuits, Schaum’s Series, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2001.

5.Eugene Xavier.S.P., Electric Circuit Analysis, New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, 2003.

11E207 ELECTRIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY


• To verify various networks theorems

•

• To get an insight into solution of RLC circuits, single phase and three phase power measurements.

To understand the concept of transients.

Program Outcomes PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and



prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations


1. Analyze the single phase and poly phase circuits.

2. Compute the parameters for two port networks and resonance circuits.

3. Simulate electric circuit using PSPICE.

30

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge on Electric Circuits

Assessment Pattern

Assessment Pattern Internal

Assessment Semester End

Examination Preparation 10 15 Observation and Results 15 20 Record 10 - Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15

Total 50 50

List of Experiments

1. Design a circuit and find branch currents using Mesh Current Method and node voltages by Nodal Voltage Method using a combination of resistors with resistance values ranges from 100Ωto1.2 KΩ and supply voltages ranges from

6V to12V.

2. Design a circuit using combination of resistors to verify Superposition and Millman’s Theorems with resistance values

ranges from 100Ωto1.2 KΩ and supply voltages ranges from 6V to12V.

3. Design a circuit using combination of resistors to verify Thevenin’s and Norton’s Theorems with resistance values

ranges from 100Ωto1.2 KΩ and supply voltages ranges from 6V to12V.

4. Obtain Frequency Response of a Series R-L-C Circuits and design L and C values for different

Values of resonant frequency.

5. Obtain Frequency Response of Parallel RLC Circuits and design L and C values for different Values of resonant

frequency.

6. Single Phase Power Measurement by Three Ammeter and Three Voltmeter Methods for different ranges of resistive

loads.

7. Three Phase Apparent Power Measurement for different ranges of inductive loads.

8. Simulation of Network theorems using PSIM/ORCAD software for domestic electrical appliances.

9. Simulation of Frequency Response of RLC Series and Parallel Circuits using PSIM/ORCAD.

10. Application of Network theorems for Lamp circuits and loud speaker circuit.

Mini Project

Total : 45 Hours

Practical Schedule

Sl. No. Experiment Hours Sl. No. Experiment Hours

1

Design a circuit and find branch currents

using Mesh Current Method and node

voltages by Nodal Voltage Method using

a combination of resistors with resistance

values ranges from 100Ωto1.2 KΩ and

supply voltages ranges from 6V to12V.

3

7

Three Phase Apparent Power

Measurement for different ranges of

inductive loads.

3

2 Design a circuit using combination of resistors to verify Superposition and

Millman’s Theorems with resistance

values ranges from 100Ωto1.2 KΩ and

supply voltages ranges from 6V to12V.

6

8 Simulation of Network theorems using PSIM/ORCAD software for domestic

electrical appliances.

3

3 Design a circuit using combination of resistors to verify Thevenin’s and Norton’s

Theorems with resistance values ranges

from 100Ωto1.2 KΩ and supply voltages

ranges from 6V to12V.

6

9 Simulation of Frequency Response of RLC Series and Parallel Circuits using

PSIM/ORCAD.

3

4

Obtain Frequency Response of a Series R-

L-C Circuits and design L and C values

for different values of resonant frequency.

3

10

Application of Network theorems

for Lamp circuits and loud speaker

circuit.

3

5 Obtain Frequency Response of

Parallel RLC Circuits and design L

and C values for different Values of

resonant frequency.

3

6

Single Phase Power Measurement by

Three Ammeter and Three Voltmeter

Methods for different ranges of resistive

load.

3

32

11O108 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LABORATORY



• To know how to execute experiments properly, presentation of observations and arrival of conclusions.

• It is an integral part of any science and technology program.

• To view and realize the theoretical knowledge acquired by the students through experiments

• At the end of the course, the students able to realize the theoretical knowledge acquired

through experiments.

Program Outcome

PO1: An ability to apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an

engineering specialization to the solution of complex Electrical and Electronics engineering

problem.

PO2: An ability to identify, formulate, research literature, and analyze complex engineering problems


engineering sciences

Course Outcomes


1. Observation and analytical skills are developed

2. Various properties of matter can be known.

3. Different optical properties can be analyzed .

Prerequsite Require knowledge in basic physics.

Assessment Pattern

Assessment Pattern

Internal Assessment

Preparation 10

Observation & Results 15 Record 10 Model Examination & Viva Voce 15

Total 50

List of Experiments

1. Determination of moment of inertia and rigidity modulus of wire using torsion pendulum

(symmetrical masses method).

2. Determination of Young’s modulus by non-uniform bending.

3. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee’s disc.

4. Determination of frequency of vibrating rod using Melde’s apparatus.

5. Determination of viscosity of a liquid - Poiseulle’s method.

6. Determination of thickness of a thin wire - air wedge method.

7. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – grating.

8. Determination of refractive index of a liquid and solid using traveling microscope.

9. Determination of energy band gap of a semiconductor diode.

10. Determination of wavelength of LASER and particle size of a given powder.

11. Measurement of numerical aperture and acceptance angle of a optical fiber.

12. Young’s modulus – uniform bending (pin and microscope).

Total: 30 Hours

Assessment Pattern

Internal Assessment

Preparation 10

Observation & Results 15 Record 10 Model Examination & Viva Voce 15

Total 50

Objectives

11O109 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LABORATORY


0 0 2 1.0

• Imparting knowledge on basic concepts and its applications of chemical analysis.

• Training in chemical and instrumental methods.

• Develop skills in estimation of a given sample by chemical and instrumental methods.

Program Outcome



problem.




Course Outcomes


1. Identify and estimate quantitatively the certain impurities present in water, which will be useful

in industry.

2. Knowledge about the conductance, rate of corrosion, pH, molecular weight of polymer and

potential which will find application in industry. Prerequsite

Require knowledge in basic chemistry from school.

Assessment Pattern

List of Experiments

1. Preparation of molar and normal solutions of the following substances – oxalic acid, sodium carbonate,

sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid.

2. Determination of alkalinity in a water sample.

3. Determination of molecular weight of a polymer by viscometry method.

4. Determination of total, temporary and permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.

5. Conductometric titration of mixture of acids.

6. Determination of strength of iron by potentiometric method using potassium dichromate.

7. Estimation of iron (thiocyanate method) in the given solution by spectrophotometric method.

8. Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid by sodium hydroxide using pH meter.

9. Determination of sodium and potassium ions in water sample by flame photometric method.

10. Determination of corrosion rate by weight loss measurements.

11. Comparison of alkalinities of the given water samples.

12. Comparison of total dissolved solids (TDS) and hardness of water in Bhavani river and Bannari Amman

Institute of Technology campus.

Total: 30 Hours

34

Objectives

11O301 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS

(Common to all branches Except Bio-Tech and CSE)

3 1 0 3.5

• To obtain the knowledge of expressing periodic functions as Fourier series, Fourier transform and Z transform which is used to analyze signals in signal processing.

• Ability to solve boundary value problems in heat and wave equation using partial differential equations.

Program Outcomes



problem.





1. Acquire knowledge in basic concepts of engineering mathematics.

2. Improvement in problem evaluation technique. 3. Choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem.

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Engineering Mathematics II.

Assessment pattern

S. No

Test I3

Test II1

Model Examination1

Semester End

Examination

1 Remember 20 20 20 20


3 Apply 30 30 30 30 4 Analyze/ Evaluate 30 30 30 30 5 Create - - -- -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Fourier Series Drichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range cosine and sine series – Parseval’s Identity

- Harmonic Analysis- Application to engineering problems.

Unit II

Fourier Transform

9 Hours

Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem -

Parseval’s Identity-Finite Fourier Transform- Application to engineering problems.

Unit III

Z -Transform and Difference Equations

9 Hours

Z-transform - Elementary properties – Inverse Z- transform – Convolution theorem -Formation of difference equations –

Solution of difference equations using Z – transform - Application to engineering problems.

9 Hours

Unit IV Partial Differential Equations

Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions – Solution of standard types of first order partial differential equations (excluing reducible to standard forms ) – Lagrange’s linear equation – Linear

partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients.

Unit V

Boundary value problems

9 Hours

Classification of second order quasi linear partial differential equations – Fourier series solutions of one dimensional wave

equation – One dimensional heat equation (Insulated ends excluded ) – Steady state olution of two-dimensional heat equation

(Insulated edges excluded ) – Fourier series solutions in Cartesian coordinates only.

9 Hours

Total: 45+15=60 Hours

Textbook(s) 1. B. S . Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publications, New Delhi , 2000. 2. K. Megalai, P. Geetha and D. Jayanthi , Mathematics for Engineers, Volume III, Vikas Publishing House, New

Delhi, 2008.

Reference(s)

1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volume III, S. Chand & Co., New

Delhi, 2008.

2. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Singapore, 2008.

3. T. Veerarajan, Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2008.

36

11E302 APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To expose the fundamentals of thermodynamics and to be able to use it in accounting for the bulk behaviour of the

physical systems.

• To integrate the basic concepts into various thermal applications like IC engines, Gas turbines, steam boiler, steam

turbine, compressors, refrigeration and air conditioning.

Program Outcome

PO3: An ability to design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or

processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety,

cultural, societal and environmental considerations.


1. Illustrate the construction of Air Standard Cycles, IC Engines and Gas Turbines

2. Analysis the concept of Steam Boilers and Turbines, Compressors, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning.

3. Investigate Heat Transfer functions in various applications.

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Mathematics

Assessment Pattern

Internal Assessment

Semester End Examination

Periodical Test I 10

100/2 = 50

Periodical Test II 10

Model Examination 15

Assignment 5

Innovative Practice 5

Attendance 5

Individual Total 50 50

Total 100

Unit I

Basic Concepts and Laws of Thermodynamics

Classical approach: Thermodynamic systems – Boundary - Control volume - System and surroundings – Universe – Properties - State-process – Cycle – Equilibrium - Work and heat transfer – Point and path functions - First law of

thermodynamics for open and closed systems - steady flow energy equations - Second law of thermodynamics - Heat engines

- Refrigerators and heat pumps - Carnot cycle - Clausius inequality – Entropy

Steam Turbine, Pressure Cooker , Steam Nozzles

Unit II

IC Engines and Air Standard Cycles

9 Hours

Working Principle of four stroke and two stroke - spark ignition and compression ignition engines - Applications of IC

engines. Air standard cycles: Otto, diesel and dual cycles and comparison of efficiency. Gas Turbines - Brayton cycle -Open

and closed cycle– Ideal and actual cycles.

Petrol Engine , Diesel Engine Unit III

Steam Boilers and Turbines

9 Hours

Formation of steam - Properties of steam – Steam power cycle (Rankine) – problems - High-pressure boilers – Mountings and

accessories – Testing of boilers. Layout diagram and working principle of a steam power plants. Steam turbines: Impulse and

reaction turbines : working principle and comparisons.

Cogeneration Steam power plant

Unit IV

Compressors

9 Hours

Positive displacement compressors – Reciprocating compressors – Indicated power – Clearance volume – Various

efficiencies – Clearance ratio - Conditions for perfect and imperfect intercooling - Multi stage with intercooling.

Screw Compressor , Centrifugal & Axial Flow Compressors. 9 Hours

Unit V

Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Unit of refrigeration –Basic functional difference between refrigeration and air conditioning - refrigerants – Vapour compression cycle and P-H and T-S diagram - Saturation cycles - Effect of sub cooling and super heating - Vapour

absorption: (qualitative treatment only) Airconditioning systems – Basic psychrometry - Simple psychrometric processes –

summer, winter, window and central air conditioning.

Domestic Refrigerator , Automobile Air Conditioning Systems. 9 Hours

Total:45 Hours

Textbook(s)

1. Mahesh M Rathore , “ Thermal Engineering’’ , Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011. 2 . P.K Nag., “Basic and Applied Engineering Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2002.

Reference(s)

1. Rogers and Mayhew, “Engineering Thermodynamics – Work and Heat Transfer”, Addision Wesley, New Delhi, 1999.

2. Eastop and McConkey, “Applied Thermodynamics”, Addison Wesley, New Delhi. 1999.

3. M.L Mathur. and F.S. Metha., “Thermal Engineering”, Jain Brothers, New Delhi, 1997.

4. B.K.Sankaar, “Thermal Enginerring”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1998.

5. R Stephen. Turns, “Thermodynamics Concepts and Applications”, Cambridge University Press, 2006.

6. http://www.freestudy.co.uk/

7. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/IIT-MADRAS/Applied

8. Thermodynamics /index.php

38

11E303 FIELD THEORY

3 1 0 3.5

Objectives

• To impart knowledge on electrostatics, magnetostatics, electro dynamic fields, electromagnetic waves and

application of vector calculus to electromagnetic fields.

• To understand how to analyze force fields in different conductor and current geometries

• To understand the relationship between electromagnetic and circuit elements.

Program Outcomes PO3: An ability to design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or




1. Diagnose vector field applicable for electromagnetic.

2. Analyze the static and dynamic electromagnetic fields.

3. Examine the electromagnetic wave propagation in different mediums. Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Engineering Maths.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II† Model


Examination 1 Remember 10 10 10 10 2 Understand 20 20 20 20 3 Apply 30 30 30 30 4 Analyze / Evaluate 30 30 30 30 5 Create 10 10 10 10

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction Sources and effects of electromagnetic fields – Vector fields – Different co-ordinate systems – Divergence theorem – Stoke’s theorem.

Transformation of coordinates

9 Hours

Hours Unit II

Electrostatics Coulomb’s Law – Electric field intensity – Field due to point and continuous charges – Gauss’s law and application – Electrical potential – Electric field and equipotential plots – Electric field in free space, conductors, dielectric – Dielectric

polarization, Electric field in multiple dielectrics – boundary conditions, Poisson’s and Laplace’s equations – Capacitance

energy density – Dielectric strength.

Electric field intensity due to surface charge distribution

Unit III

Magnetostatics

9 Hours

Lorentz Law of force, magnetic field intensity – Biot–savart Law - Ampere’s Law – Magnetic field due to straight conductors, circular loop, infinite sheet of current – Magnetic flux density (B) – B in free space, conductor, magnetic

materials – Magnetization – Magnetic field in multiple media – Boundary conditions – Scalar and vector potential – Magnetic

force – Torque – Inductance – Energy density – Magnetic circuits.

Scalar magnetic potential 9Hours

Unit IV

Electrodynamic Fields Faraday’s laws, induced emf – Static and dynamic EMF, Maxwell’s equations (differential and integral forms) –

Displacement current – Relation between field theory and circuit theory.

Maxwell’ equation for sinusoidal time varying quantity

Unit V

Electromagnetic Waves

9 Hours

Generation – Electro Magnetic Wave equations – Wave parameters, velocity, intrinsic impedance, propagation constant –

Waves in free space, lossy and lossless dielectrics, conductors-skin depth, Poynting vector – Plane wave reflection .

Skin effect

Hours

Textbook(s)

1. William H. Hayt & Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics", Eighth edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.

9 Hours Total:45+15

Reference(s) 1. K. A. Gangadhar, Ramanathan, “Electromagnetic Field Theory”, Khanna Publishers,Sixteenth Edition,2011.

2. A. Joseph.. Edminister and Vishnu Priye, “Electromagnetics”, Special Indian edition , Schaum’s Outlines, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009. 3. R.Meenakumari, R.Subasri “ Electromagnetic Fields”, New Age International (p) Ltd Publishers, 5th edition 2010.

4. Bhag Sing Guru and Huseyin R. Hiziroglu, “Electromagnetic Field Theory Fundamentals” , Cambridge university Press, fourth

Edition, 2010.

5. Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Fifth Edition, Oxford University Press, 2010

6. Kraus and Fleish, “Electromagnetics with Applications”, McGraw Hill International Editions, Fifth Edition, 2008

7. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php.

8. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-%20Guwahati/em/index.htm

11E304 DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS 4 0 0 4.0

Objectives

• To understand the working principle, performance characteristics of DC Generator and DC Motor

• To understand the different types of Transformers, working principle and their performance

• To estimate the various losses taking place in DC machines and Transformers and apply the different testing

methods to arrive their performance

Program Outcomes









1. Illustrate the construction, working principle & performance characteristics of different types of DC

Generator, DC Motor, transformers

2. Analyze the speed control techniques and the starters used for DC motors

3. Estimate the various losses taking place in DC machines and Transformers and apply the different testing

methods to asses their performance Prerequsite

40

• Require knowledge in Electric circuits.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II† Model



Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

DC Generators Constructional details – Principle – EMF equation – Methods of excitation – Self and separately excited generators – Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators – Armature reaction and commutation – Parallel operation –

Applications.

Comparison of series, shunt and compound generator

12 Hours

Unit II

DC Motors

Principle of operation – Types – Back EMF and torque equations – Circuit model – Characteristics – Starting methods –

Speed control – Separation of no load losses.

Comparison of starting methods 12 Hours

Unit III

Testing of DC Machines Losses and efficiency in DC machines– Condition for maximum efficiency – Testing of DC machines – Brake test, Swinburne’s est, Retardation test and Hopkinson’s test.

Hopkinson’s test

Unit IV

Transformers

12 Hours

Constructional details – Types of windings – Principle of operation – EMF equation – Transformation ratio – Transformer on no-load – Equivalent circuit – Transformer on-load – Regulation – Parallel operation – Auto transformer – Saving of copper

– Instrument transformers – Three phase transformers and their connections – Vector group.

Instrumentl transformers

Unit V

Testing of Transformers

12 Hours

Losses and efficiency in transformers – Condition for maximum efficiency – Testing of transformers – Polarity test – Load

test - Phasing out test – open circuit and short circuit test - Sumpner’s test – Separation of losses – All day efficiency.

Importance of all day efficiency

Textbook(s)

12 Hours

Total: 60 Hours

1. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, Electric Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2010.

Reference(s)

1. P. S. Bimbhra, Electrical Machinery, Khanna Publishers, 2007. 2. A. E. Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley, Stephen.D.Umans, Electric Machinery, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Company

Ltd, 2003.

3. Stephen J.Chapman, Electric Machinery Fundamentals, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.

4. B. L. Theraja, A. K. Theraja, A Text Book of Electrical Technology – Volume II, S.Chand & Company Ltd, New

Delhi, 2007.

Objectives

11E305 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS

3 0 0 3.0

• To learn the use of DC and AC bridges for measuring R, L and C

• To learn the use of different types of analog meters for measuring electrical quantities such as current, voltage,

power, energy, power factor and frequency

• To learn the principle of working and applications of CRO and other electronic measuring devices

• Use these to simple engineering applications.

Program Outcomes



PO5 : An ability to create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering tools

including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the

limitations

PO12: ability to recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-

long learning in the broadest context of technological change


1. Analyze the performance characteristics of functional elements of an instrument.

2. Investigate and select the appropriate instruments for measuring electrical and Physical quantities.

3. Discriminate the functions of various Transducers and devices used for storage and display in Data

Acquisition Systems. Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Electric circuits analysis I.

Assessment Pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model




Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction Units and dimensions – Functional elements of an instrument – Static and dynamic characteristics – Errors in measurement –

Statistical evaluation of measurement data – Standards and calibration

Importance and need for calibration

Unit II

Electrical and Electronics Instruments

9 Hours

Principle and types of analog and digital voltmeters, ammeters, multimeters – Single and three phase wattmeters and energy

meters – Magnetic measurements – Determination of B-H curve and measurements of iron loss – Power Quality Meters –

Instruments for measurement of frequency and phase.

Range extension of meters

Unit III

Measurements, Storage and Display Devices

9 Hours

42

DC and AC potentiometers - Self-balancing potentiometer - DC & AC bridges, transformer ratio bridges, Electrostatic and

electromagnetic interference – Grounding techniques - Digital plotters and printers, digital CRO.

Importance of grounding

Unit IV

Transducers and Data Acquisition Systems

9 Hours

Classification of transducers: Resistive, capacitive & inductive transducers – Piezoelectric, optical and digital transducers –

Data acquisition systems

Applications of transducer 9 Hours

Unit V

Measurement of Physical Quantities

Measurement of Temperature: Thermocouples – Radiation and Optical pyrometer – Low and high pressure measurements – Differential pressure measurement – Flow measurement: Pitot tube, hot wire and hot film anemometer, venturi and orifice

meter, ultrasonic and electromagnetic flow meter – Level, viscosity and pH measurement.

Application of flow measurement 9

Hours

Total:45 Hours

Textbook(s)

1. A. K. Sawhney, A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation, Dhanpat Rai and Co, 2004

Reference(s)

1. E. O. Doebelin, Measurement Systems – Application and Design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company, 2003. 2. D. V. S. Moorthy, Transducers and Instrumentation, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2003.

3. H. S. Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd edition 2011. 4. Martin Reissland, Electrical Measurements, New Age International (P) Ltd., Delhi, 2001.

5. J. B. Gupta, A Course in Electronic and Electrical Measurements, S. K. Kataria & Sons, Delhi, 2003

11E306 CONCEPTS OF ENGINEERING DESIGN 3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To understand the basic concepts of Engineering design

• To understand the concept generation and evaluation

• To know the fundamentals of Intellectual property rights

• Students will be able to effectively design various engineering components and make process plan for the production

Program Outcome PO9: An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in

multidisciplinary settings

PO11: An ability to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management principles and

apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in

multidisciplinary environments.


1. Identify the social needs, generate and select an appropriate engineering solution to satisfy it

2. Analyze the design process for different factors and grounding and shielding methods

3. Formulate the IPR report for innovative products

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Engineering design

.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II† Model


Examination 1 Remember 10 10 10 10 2 Understand 20 20 20 20 3 Apply 30 30 30 30 4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40 5 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Principles and Problem Identification Engineering design introduction and definition, Considerations of a good design, Engineering design interfaces, Principles of engineering design, Problem identification, Design process, simplified approach and detailed description.

Steps involved in design process 9

Hours

Unit II

Technological innovation and Concept Generation

Introduction, Product and process cycle, Societal considerations in engineering, Creativity and problem solving, Creativity methods, before problem definition step, identifying customer needs, Marketing, Benchmarking.

Creavity and its methods 9

Hours

Unit III

Concept Evaluation and Design Process Evaluation methods, Decision making, Decision theory, Classification of manufacturing process, Design for manufacturing (DFM), Design for Assembly (DFA), Industrial design, Human factors design, Design for environment.

Classification of manufacturing process and its design procedure 9

Hours

Unit IV

Planning for Management and Manufacture

Production design specification (PDS), Quality function deployment (QFD), Design review, Value analysis/engineering,

Detail design, Role of processing in design, Materials selection.

Product design specification for car, motor and generator

Unit V

Intellectual Property Rights and Case Studies

9 Hours

Introduction, Study prior inventions, Patent, Patent literature, Expert system. Presentation Techniques, Introduction, Design

report, Case studies

Need for design report 9

Hours

Textbook

1. George E. Dieter, Engineering Design, 4th Edition,McGraw – Hill International, 2008

44

Reference(s)

1. Kenneth S. Hurst, Engineering Design Principles, Elsevier Science and Technology Books, May 1999. 2. Richard Birmingham, Graham Cleland, Robert Driver and David Maffin, Understanding Engineering

Design, Prentice Hall of India.

3. G. Pahl, W. Beitz, J. Feldhusan and K.H. Grote, Engineering Design, Springer, 2007.

4. Yousef Haik and Tamer M. Shahin, Engineering Design Process, Cengage Learning, 2010.

5. John Chris Jones, Design Methods, John Wiley & Sons, 2002.

6. www.patentoffice.nic.in

11E307 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 2 0 2 3.0

Objectives

• To understand the concepts of Object Oriented Programming.

• To gain thorough knowledge in programming with C++.

• Develop the necessary dynamic memory allocation for the programDevelop the flowchart for the

problems

Program Outcome PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis

and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions


1. Analysis the operator, inheritance in the object oriented programming.

2. Apply the pointers arrays, and functions in C++ programming.

3. Evaluate streams, template, I/O in the C programming.

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in “C” Programming. Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model Examination

†

Semester End

Examination

1 Remember 10 10 10 10 2 Understand 20 20 20 20 3 Apply 20 20 20 20 4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40 5 Create 10 10 10 10

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction Need for object oriented programming – Procedural Languages vs. Object oriented approach - Characteristics Object oriented

programming - C++ Programming Basics: Basic Program Construction - Output Using cout - Input with cin - Data types -

Variables and Constants – Operators - Control Statements-Manipulators - Type conversion.

Unit II

Objects and Classes

6 Hours

Simple Class - C++ Objects as Physical Objects – C++ Object as Data types- Constructors and Destructors- Object as

Function Arguments - Returning Objects from Functions - Structures and Classes - Arrays and Strings.

6 Hours

Unit III

Operator Overloading and Inheritance Need of operator overloading- Overloading Unary Operators- Overloading binary Operators - Overloading Special Operators - Data Conversion-

Inheritance: Derived Class and Base Class - Derived Class Constructors-Overriding Member Functions-Class Hierarchies-

Public and Private Inheritance-Levels of Inheritance-Multiple Inheritance.

Unit IV

Polymorphism and File Streams

6 Hours

Virtual Function – Friend Function – Static Function-Assignment and Copy Initialization- Memory Management: new and

delete-Pointers to Objects, this Pointer- Streams – String I/O – Character I/O – Object I/O – I/O with Multiple Objects – File

Pointers – Disk I/O with Member Functions- Error Handling in File I/O.

Unit V

Templates and Exception Handling

6 Hours

Templates: Introduction - Function Templates - Overloading Function Templates - Class Templates - Exception Handling –

Syntax, multiple exceptions, exceptions with arguments.

6 Hours

Total: 30 hours

Lab Component

1. Define a class to represent a bank account to include the following members.

Data Members: Name of the depositors, Account number, Type of account, Balance amount in the

account.

Member functions: To initialize values to data members, To deposit an amount, To withdraw an

account after checking the balance, To display the name and the balance.

Note: Try to use all types of constructors

2. Implement function overloading (eg. Write functions to add 2 or numbers of different data types.)

3. Implement the concept of default argumented function.

4. Implement the concept of array of objects.

5. Implement a class with dynamic objects and use constructors and destructors

6. Implement the concept of Inheritance.

7. Implement the concept of operator overloading.

8. Illustrate the use of static data member and static member functions by keeping track of number of

instances of object that are created and alive.

9. Implement friend functions and friend classes to add the private data member of two different

classes.

10. Write a program to copy the content of one file to another file by removing unnecessary spaces

between words.

Total: 30 hours

Textbook

1. Robert Lafore, Object Oriented Programming in-C++, Galgotia Publication.

Total: 30+30 hours

References 1. Deitel & Deitel, C++ How to program, Prentice Hall,2005. 2. D.S.Malik, C++ Programming, Thomson, 2007.

3. K.R. Venugopal, Rajkumar and T.Ravishankar, Mastering C++, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2006.

46

Objectives

11E308 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5

• To draw the static input and output characteristics of a PNP and NPN transistors in CB and CE

configurations and find the respective hybrid parameters.

• To obtain the drain (or output) characteristics of an n-channel JFET and to determine the drain resistance.

Also obtain the transfer characteristic of the same JFET and determine the transconductance factor from the curve.

• To construct an unregulated power supply using a transformer, a rectifier circuit and a capacitor filter.

Study the load regulation of the power supply.

• To observe waveforms and to measure amplitude, frequency and phase of different waveforms generated

by a function-generator using a CRO.

Program Outcomes

PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis




limitations

Course Outcomes


1. Understand the characteristics of PN diode , zener diode , BJT , JFET , UJT and other electronic devices 2. Study and simulate the power supplies , amplifiers

3. Generate different frequency signals using oscillators

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Electron Devices and Circuits.

Assessment Pattern

Internal



Total 50 50

List Of Experiments 1. Design the transistor switch for the given load resistance for different configuration and to find hybrid parameters. 2. Static characteristics and parameter determination of JFET

3. Design the low and full battery indicator using zener diode

4. Single phase Full wave rectifier with capacitive filter for logical IC‘s and Design the 5V voltage regulator for

microcontroller.

5. Static characteristics of UJT and its application as a relaxation oscillator

6. Design the phase shift and wein bridge oscillator for different frequencies

7. Frequency response of common emitter amplifier for radio frequency circuit

8. Differential amplifier using transistor to reduce humming in microphones

9. Simulation of rectifiers, oscillators and amplifiers for various industrial applications using PSIM

Mini Project

Total: 45 Hours

Sl. No. Experiment Hours Sl. No. Experiment Hours 1 Design the transistor switch for the

given load resistance for different

configuration and to find hybrid

parameters.

3 6 Design the phase shift and wein bridge oscillator for different

frequencies

5

2 Static characteristics and parameter determination of JFET

6 7 Frequency response of common emitter amplifier for radio frequency

circuit

6

3 Design the low and full battery indicator using zener diode

3 8 Differential amplifier using

transistor to reduce humming in

microphones

3

4 Single phase Full wave rectifier with capacitive filter for logical IC‘s and

Design the 5V voltage regulator for

microcontroller

6

9

Simulation of rectifiers, oscillators

and amplifiers for various industrial

applications using PSIM

3

5 Static characteristics of UJT and its application as a relaxation oscillator

3

10 Mini Project 7

Internal



Total 50 50

Practical Schedule

Objectives

11E309 DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5

• To make the students understand the behavior of DC motor and generator under various loading conditions.

• After the completion of the experiments offered the students will be able to perform the tests required to know the

performance and characteristics of the machines independently

Program Outcomes






Course Outcomes


1. Conduct experiments ,analyze results and develop technically sound reports on performance of DC machines & transformers 2. Use various measuring instruments to obtain the data’s required for predicting the equivalent circuit models, to predict

correctly the expected performance of DC machines and transformers

3. Use the standard methods for testing of DC machines and transformers and evaluate the losses

occurring in it.

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Electric Circuit analysis.

Assessment Pattern

List of Experiments

1.Magnetization and load characteristics in a separately excited DC generator and shunt generator. 2.Analysis of terminal voltage in a DC generator under differential and cumulative mode.

48

S. No

Test Iiii

Test II1

Model Examination1

End Semester

Examination

3.Performance characteristics of DC compound motor.

4.Load characteristics of DC motor used in lifts and rolling mills.

5.Predetermination of efficiency of a constant speed DC machine

6.Constant torque and constant power experiment in DC shunt motor

7.Parallel operation of DC motor generator set

8. Performance evaluation of 1Φ and 3Φ transformers at various loading conditions.

9. No load and impedance test on 1Φ transformers.

1. Determining the efficiency of 2 parallel connected transformers

2. Mini Project

Practical Schedule

Total: 45 Hours

Sl. No. Experiment Hours Sl. No. Experiment Hours 1 Magnetization and load characteristics in

a separately excited DC generator and

shunt generator

6 6 Constant torque and constant power experiment in DC shunt motor

3

2 Analysis of terminal voltage in a DC

generator under differential and

cumulative mode.

3 7 Parallel operation of DC motor generator set

3

3 Performance characteristics of DC compound motor.

3 8 Performance evaluation of 1Φ and 3Φ transformers at various loading

conditions.

6

4 Load characteristics of DC motor used in lifts and rolling mills

3 9 No load and impedance test on 1Φ transformers

3

5 Predetermination of efficiency of a constant speed DC machine

3 10 Determining the efficiency of

2 parallel connected transformers

3

Objectives

11E401 NUMERICAL METHODS AND OPERATIONS RESEARCH 3 1 0 3.5

• Solve any type of mathematical equations, integrations and differentiations of any functions using Numerical

methods.

• Have sound knowledge of Interpolation and to find an intermediate value during any process of their experiment.

• Convert a given problem of optimization into a mathematical equation and to provide a solution to the problems.

Program Outcome





Course outcomes


1. Acquire knowledge in basic concept of engineering mathematics. 2. Improve problem evaluation technique.

3. Choose an appropriate method to solve a practical problem. 4. Applications of Numerical methods in computer field.

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Engineering mathematics III.

Assessment pattern

1 Remember 20 20 20 20


3 Apply 30 30 30 30 4 Analyze/ Evaluate 30 30 30 30 5 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations Newton Raphson method - Method of false position - Graffe’s root squaring method - Bairstow’s method. Gauss elimination

-crout’s method - Gauss-seidel method - Eigen value of a matrix by power method.

Unit II

Finite Differences and Interpolation

9 Hours

Interpolation: Difference table - Newton Gregory forward and backward interpolation - Newton divided difference

interpolation formula - Lagrange’s interpolation formula.

Unit III

Numerical Differentiation and Integration

9 Hours

Numerical differentiation: Newton – Gregory forward and backward interpolation. Numerical integration: Two and Three

point Gaussian quadrature formulae - Trapezoidal rule and Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/8 rules. Double integrals: Trapezoidal rule

and Simpson’s rule.

Unit IV

Initial Value Problems for Ordinary Differential Equations

9 Hours

Single step Methods: Taylor’s series method for solving first and second order equations - Euler’s and Modified Euler’s

method -Runge Kutta method for solving first order equations. Multistep Methods: Milne’s and Adams Bashforth predictor

and Corrector methods.

Unit V Linear Programming

Modelling, Graphical method, Definitions, statement of basic theorems and properties, Simplex method.

9 Hours

MATLAB: Invited Lectures on MATLAB and its applications on Numerical methods.

9Hours

Total: 45+15 Hours

Textbooks

1. M.B.K. Moorthy and P.Geetha, Numerical Methods, Tata McGraw Hill Publications company, New Delhi, 2011. 2. Kanti swarup, Gupta, Manmohan, Operations Research, S.Chand and Co., New Delhi, 1995.

References

1. Gupta and Hira, Problems in Operations Research, S.Chand and Co., New Delhi, 1991. 2. M.K.Jain , S.R.K. Iyangar , R.K.Jain , Numerical Methods For Scientific & Engineering Computation, New Age

International ( P ) Ltd , New Delhi , 2005.

3. T.Veerarajan, Numerical Methods with programs in C, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2008.

50

11E402 AC MACHINES

4 0 0 4 . 0

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model Examination

†

Semester End

Examination


Total 100 100 100 100

Objectives

• understand the working principle, performance characteristics of Alternator and Synchronous Motor

• To understand the different types of induction motor, working principle and their performance

• To select the appropriate machine from the knowledge of starting and speed control of three- phase induction motors

Program Outcomes



problem.

PO3: An ability to design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components

or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and

safety, cultural, societal and environmental considerations.



Course Outcomes


1. Illustrate the construction, working principle & performance characteristics of different types of

AC Generator and AC Motor for single phase, three phase and special AC machines.

2. Analyze the speed control techniques, braking methods and the starting methods used for

single phase and three phase ac machine.

3. Evaluate the equivalent circuit, torque, EMF, voltage regulation, efficiency speed, armature power,

shaft power & synchronizing power of ac machine

4. Synchronization of alternator and application of AC machines. Prerequ

site

• Require knowledge in DC machines.

Assessment Pattern

Unit I Three Phase Induction Machines

Constructional details – Types of rotors – Principle of operation – Slip – Equivalent circuit –

Slip- torque characteristics – Condition for maximum torque – Losses and efficiency –No load and blocked rotor tests – Circle diagram – Separation of no load losses – Crawling and cogging – Electrical braking – Double

cage rotors – Synchronous induction motor – Induction generator, types

Application of induction motor 12 Hours

Unit II-Alternator

52

Constructional details – Types of rotors, operating characteristics – Emf equation – Synchronous reactance –

Armature reaction – Voltage regulation – EMF, MMF, ZPF and ASA methods – Synchronizing and parallel

operation – Synchronizing power – Change of excitation and mechanical input – Blondel’s theory – Determination

of Xd and Xq using slip test

Application of alternator 12 Hours

UNIT-III Starting and Speed Control of Three Phase Induction Motors

Need for starting – Types of starters – Stator resistance and reactance, rotor resistance, autotransformer and star- delta starters – Speed control by Changing voltage, frequency, number of poles and slip – Cascaded connections – Slip power recover y scheme – Kramer’s system – Scherbius system

Application of slip power recovery scheme 12 Hours

Unit IV

Single Phase Induction Motors and Special

Machines

Constructional details – Two revolving field theory – Equivalent circuit – No load and blocked rotor

tests – Performance analysis – Starting methods – Types and applications – Special machines – Shaded pole induction motor, reluctance motor, repulsion motor, hysteresis motor, stepper motor, Linear induction motor

and AC series motor

Application l inear induction motor 12 Hours

Unit V

Synchronous Motors

Principle of operation – Torque equation – Starting methods – Operation on infinite bus bars – V and inverted

V curves – Power/power angle relations – Current loci for constant power input, constant excitation and

constant power developed – Hunting and methods of suppression – Synchronous condenser, applications –

Introduction to Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor(PMSM)

Importance of power factor improvement

Textbook

12 Hours

Total: 60 Hours

2010.

1. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, Electric Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, Fourth Edition

Reference(s)

1. A. E. Fitzgerald, Charles Kingsley, Stephen.D.Umans, Electric Machinery, Tata McGraw Hill publishing

Company Ltd, Six Edition, 2002.

2. Stephen J.Chapman, Electric Machinery Fundamentals, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, Fifth Edition 2005

3. P. S. Bhimbhra, Electrical Machinery, Khanna Publishers, Seventh Edition 2011.

Objectives

11E403 CONTROL ENGINEERING 3 1 0 3.5

• To describe feedback control and basic components of control systems

• To understand the various time domain and frequency domain tools for analysis and design of linear

control systems

• To study the methods to analyze the stability of systems from transfer function forms

• To describe the methods of designing compensators

Program Outcomes



PO3: An ability to design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system components or processes

that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, cultural, societal


PO12: ability to recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-long

learning in the broadest context of technological change

Course Outcomes


1. Develop a mathematical model of electrical and physical system.

2. Analyze the electrical and mechanical analysis in time and frequency domains.

3. Examine stability analysis techniques with appropriate compensators

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in DC machines and electric circuits.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model

Examination†



Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Mathematical Model of Physical Systems Open loop and closed loop systems with examples – Elements of control system – Mathematical representation of systems – Transfer function of mechanical, electrical, thermal, hydraulic, and pneumatic systems - Transfer function

of overall systems using block diagram reduction technique – Signal flow graph.

Importance of mathematical model

9 Hours

9 Hours

Unit II

Time domain Analysis

Standard test signals - Transient response of first and second order systems – Time domain

specifications – Steady state errors and error constants – Generalized error series – Dominant

poles of transfer functions – P, PI, PID models of feedback control systems.

Need for time domain analysis and its applicaion

54

Unit III

Frequency Domain Analysis 9 Hours

Frequency response of systems - Frequency domain specifications - Polar plot – Bode plot – Constant

M and N circles – Nichols chart. Need for frequency domain analysis and its applicaion

Unit IV

Stability of Control Systems

Concepts of stability – Characteristic equation – Routh-Hurwitz criterion – Root-Locus technique - Nyquist stability

criterion. Impacts of stability and its improvement methods

9 Hours

Unit V

Compensator Design

Design Specifications – Lag, lead and lag-lead networks – Cascade compensator design using Bode plot. Applications of

Compensators

9 Hours

Total: 45+15 Hours

Textbook

1. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New Age International Publisher, 2007.

Reference(s)

1. M. Gopal, Control System Principles and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008. 2. S. Palani, Control System Engg, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2009. 3. K. Ogatta, Modern Control Engineering, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006.

4. Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 2003.

5. M. N. Bandyopadhyay, Control Engineering Theory and Practice, Prentice Hall of India, 2005.

Objectives

11E404 POWER SYSTEM I 3 0 0 3.0

• To develop mathematical models for computation of fundamental parameters of lines.

• To categorize the transmission lines and develop equivalent circuits for these classes.

• To analyze the voltage distribution in insulator strings and cables and methods to improve

the same

Program Outcomes



problem.





processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, cultural, societal and environmental considerations.

Course Outcomes


1. Analyze the performance of transmission lines.

2. Examine the construction and applications of insulators and cables for transmission systems.

3. Illustrate the structure of distribution systems .

56

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Electric circuit analysis II.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model

Examination†

Semester End

Examination


Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I-Line parameters Introduction to power system scenario – Resistance, Inductance and capacitance of single phase and three phase

line – Stranded and bundled conductor configurations – Hollow conductors – Symmetrical and unsymmetrical

spacing – Transposition of line conductors – Double circuit lines – Application of self and mutual GMD – Skin and proximity effects- Earth effect on capacitance,Inductive interference

Earth effect on capacitance,Inductive interference. 9 Hours

Unit II-Performance of

transmission Line

Regulations and Efficiency of short – Medium transmission lines by nominal T & methods, long lines –

Rigorous solutions – ABCD constant- Ferranti effect 9 Hours

Ferranti Effect

Unit III HVDC and Corona

HVDC – Introduction – Types – Advantages and disadvantages – Phenomenon of corona – Disruptive critical

voltage – Visual critical voltage - Corona loss – Radio interference on transimission lines.

Radio interference on transimission lines

9 Hours

Unit IV

Cables Insulators and Mechanical Design of Transmission Lines Types – Capacitance of cables – Grading of cables – HVDC cables – Types of towers - Insulators – Types and

comparison – Voltage distribution in insulator string – String efficiency – Methods of improving string efficiency – Sag calculations – Effect of wind and ice- Supports at different levels.

Effect of wind and ice

9 Hours

Unit V Distribution Systems and Substations

AC distribution – Radial and ring main systems – Ring main distributions with interconnections – Analysis of AC

distribution systems, Substation – Types of substation- Sample substation layout – Tariff calculation.

Types of substation

Textbook

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

1. B.R.Gupta, “Power System Analysis & Design”, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi sixth revised edition 2011

References

1. C.L .Wadhwa,. “Electrical Power Systems”, New Age International Edition, New Delhi 2005 2. I.J.Nagrath, D.P.Kothari, “Power System Engineering” Tata McGraw Hill Ltd, New Delhi 2007

3. V.K.Mehta, Rohit Mehta, “Principles of Power Systems”, S. Chand & Co.,New Delhi 2011

11E405 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

Objectives

• To impart knowledge in the concepts of functional building blocks of different types of IC’s

• To use IC’s like timers and PLL circuits for engineering application

3 0 0 3.0

Program Outcomes




processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, cultural, societal and environmental considerations

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Illustrate the fabrication of ICs

2. Analyze the characteristics and applications of operational amplifiers.

3. Understand the applications of special IC’s.

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Electron devices and circuits.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†


Semester End

Examination


Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I IC Fabrication IC classification, thick and thin film- fundamentals of monolithic IC technology, epitaxial growth, masking and

etching, diffusion of impurities - Realization of monolithic ICs and packaging, fabrication of active and passive components – recent trends in fabrication.

Thick and thin film technology

Unit II

Characteristics of Op-Amp

9 Hours

Ideal Op-Amp characteristics, DC characteristics, AC characteristics, offset voltage and current - voltage series feedback and shunt feedback amplifiers, differential amplifier - frequency response of Op-Amp – Slew rate and

applications- single power supply Op-Amps.

Methods of improving slew rate

Unit III

Applications of Opamp

9 Hours

Instrumentation amplifier, first order active filters, V/I & I/V converters, comparators, summer, differentiator and

58

integrator –waveform generators (Square,Triangle,Sine), clippers, clampers, peak detector, S/H circuit, D/A

converter (R-2R ladder and weighted resistor types), A/D converter (Dual slope, successive approximation).

V to I and I to V converters 9 Hours

Unit IV

Special ICs

555 Timer circuit – Functional block, characteristics & applications; 566-voltage controlled oscillator circuit; 565- phase lock loop circuit functioning and applications, Analog multiplier ICs

Analog multiplier ICs 9 Hours

Unit V

Application ICs IC voltage regulators – LM317, 723 regulators, - switching regulator, - LM 380 power amplifier, ICL8038 function

generator IC, Isolation amplifier (iso122/iso721), opto coupler (MCT2E) - PWM generation ICs(SG1524/UC2638).

Isolation amplifier (iso122/iso721)

Textbooks

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

1. Ramakant A. Gayakwad, Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education Asia Ltd, 2003.

2. D. Roy Choudhury, Shail B. Jain, Linear Integrated Circuits, Fourth Edition New Age International, 2010

References

1. S. Salivahanan and V.S. Kanchana Bhaaskaran , Linear Integrated Circuits, First reprint, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.

2. Jacob Millman, Christos C.Halkias, Integrated Electronics - Analog and Digital Circuits System, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.

3. Robert F.Coughlin, Frederick F.Driscoll, Operational-Amplifiers and Linear Integrated Circuits, Sixth Edition Pearson Education.

4. David A.Bell, Operational Amplifiers and Linear ICs, Second Edition Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model

Examination†

Semester End

Examination


Total 100 100 100 100

11E406 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To study various number systems and to simplify the mathematical expressions using Boolean

functions – simple problems.

• To study implementation of combinational circuits.

• To study the design of various synchronous and asynchronous circuits.

• To expose the students to various memory devices.

Program Outcomes






Course Outcomes


1. Infer the various number systems and implementation of combinational Systems.

2. Design of various synchronous and asynchronous circuits.

3. Interpret different memory devices and PLDs.

Prerequsite


Assessment Pattern

Unit I Number System & Boolean Algebra Review of number system; Types and conversion codes – Boolean algebra: De-Morgan’s theorem – switching functions and simplification using K-maps- Quine McCluskey method

Quine McCluskey method

9 Hours

Unit II Combinational Circuits

Design using logic gates – Design of adders, subtractors, comparators, code converters, encoders, decoders–

multiplexers and demultiplexers- Function realization using multiplexers.

multiplexers and demultiplexers

9 Hours

Unit III Synchronous Sequential Circuits

Flip flops - SR, JK - MSJK and D and T – Analysis of syn chronous sequential circuits;– Design of synchronous

sequential circuits-Counters, state diagram; state reduction; state assignment.

Design of synchronous sequential circuits

9 Hours

Unit IV

60

Asynchronous Sequential Circuits

Analysis of asynchronous sequential machines – State assignment – Asynchronous design problem.

Difference between Synchronous and Asynchronous Sequential Circuits. 9 Hours

Unit V

Programmable Logic Devices, Memories and Logic Families

Memories: ROM, PROM, EPROM, Study of memor y ICs, Control signals and their programmers. Programmable Logic Devices: PLA, PAL, PLD, FPGA

FPGA 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. Malvino and Leach, Digital Principles and Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

Reference(s)

1. S.K.Manal, Digital Electronics Principles and Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

2. John M.Yarbrough, Digital Logic, Application & Design, Thomson, 2002.

3. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, Pearson Education, 2003.

4. John F.Wakerly, Digital Design Principles and Practice, Pearson Education, 2002.

5. M. Morris Mano, Digital Logic and Computer Design, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.

.

11E407 DATA STRUCTURES

Objectives

• To impart in-depth knowledge of Data Structures.

• To understand, how the concepts of data structures are applied for real world problems.

Program Outcomes

2 0 2 3.0


analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions Course Outcomes On completion of this course, the student will be able to

1. Solve the problems in algorithms & ADT.

2. Apply the concept of trees, list stack and queues in various algorithms

3. Examine the graphs in different applications.

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in object oriented programming.

Assessment pattern

S.No

Test I†

Test II† Model

Examination† Semester End Examination

1 Remember 10 10 10 10


3 Apply 20 20 20 20


5 Create 10 10 10 10

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction

Pseudo code – Abstract Data types - Model for an ADT - ADT Implementations - Algorithm Efficiency - Designing

Recursive Algorithms - Recursive Examples.

Designing Recursive Algorithms

Unit II

Linear List: Stacks, Queues and Lists

6 Hours

Arrays – Basic Stack Operation - Stack ADT - Applications of Stack – Queues Operations - Queue ADT – Queue

Applications - List ADT- Circular - Doubly Linked List.

Doubly Linked List

Unit III

Sorting and Searching

6 Hours

Sorting: Insertion Sort - Selection Sort - Bubble Sort - Merge sort – Quick sort – Heap sort - shell sort - External Sorts. Searching: Sequential search - Binary Search – Hashing – General Idea – Hash Function – Separate Chaining

– Open Addressing – Linear Probing.

Binary Search

Unit IV

Non Linear List: Trees

6 Hours

Basic Tree concepts - Binary Trees– Tree Traversals –Expression Trees-Binary Search Trees – AVL Search Trees-

Heap concepts-Implementation-Heap ADT-Heap Applications: Priority Queue.

62

Binary Search Trees 6 Hours

Unit V Graphs

Definitions – Traverse Graph: Depth first Traversal-Breadth first Traversal-Shortest Path Algorithms: Unweighted

Shortest Paths – Dijkstra’s Algorithm. Minimum Spanning Tree: Prim’s Algorithm– Kruskals Algorithm.

Kruskals Algorithm.

Lab Component

1. Array Implementation of Stack and Queues

2. Link List Implementation of Stack and Queues

6 Hours

Total: 30 Hours

3. Program to perform various operations such as creation, insertion, deletion, search and display on singly

linked list.

4. Program to perform various operations such as creation, insertion, deletion, search and display on doubly

linked list.

5. Program to sort the elements in ascending order using Selection Sort and Bubble Sort

6. Implementation of Quick sort

7. Write the descending order program to sort the elements using Heap sort.

8. Develop a program to perform Linear and Binary Search 9. Implementation of binary Tree traversal

10. Write a program to perform Infix into Postfix expression, Prefix to Postfix expression

11. Implementation of Breadth First Search and Depth first Search Techniques.

12. Design Experiments

13. Application oriented Experiments

Total: 30 Hours Total: 30 +30 Hours

Textbook(s)

1. M.A.Weiss, Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C, Pearson Education Asia. 2. Richard F. Gilberg, and Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Structures – A Pseudocode Approach with C,

Thomson.

Reference(s) 1. Y.Langsam, M.J.Augenstein and A.M.Tenenbaum, Data Structures using C, PHI, 2004.

2. Aho, J.E.Hopcroft and J.D.Ullman, Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson education, Asia, 2010

Objectives

11E408 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5

• To learn the use of DC and AC bridges for measuring R, L and C

• To learn the use of different types of analog meters for measuring electrical quantities such as current,

voltage, power, energy, power factor and frequency

• To learn the principle of working and applications of CRO and other electronic measuring devices

• To understand the use of special purpose instruments

Program Outcomes




PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods i ncluding design of experiments, analysis


PO9: An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary

settings.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Use oscilloscopes to measure voltage waveforms as function of time

2. Acquire knowledge in designing AC and DC bridges

3. Apply statistical analyze to data samples to calculate mean, S.D etc and to determine ac curacy, precision and

sensitivity of sensors and instruments

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in measurement and instrumentation system. .Assessment Pattert

Internal



Total 50 50

List Of Experiments 1. Characteristics of LVDT and Current to Pressure Converter 2. Calibration of Ammeter, Voltmeter and Dynamometer type Power Factor Meter

3. Measurement of resistance using Wheatstone Bridge and Kelvin Double Bridge

4. Measurement of inductance using Maxwell’s Inductance Bridge and capacitance using Schering Bridge

5. Temperature measurement using RTD, Thermistor and Thermocouple

6. Measurement of Strain, Torque and Angular Displacement

7. Measurement of electrical energy for Domestic Appliances

8. Design an Instrumentation Amplifier having the gain range (10 – 1000), R1 = 25 kΩ, R2 = 50 kΩ, Rf = 30 kΩ.

Determine the value of RG and the output voltage Vo for V1 = 5V and V2 = 3V.

9. Design 2 bit Flash type Analog to Digital converter and verify the output 10. Design Digital to Analog converter for the value of resistance(R) ranging from 1 kΩ - 25 kΩ using

Weighted resistor and R-2R ladder type for 2, 3 and 4 bit. Mini Project

64

Practical Schedule

Sl. No. Experiment Hours Sl. No. Experiment Hours 1 Characteristics of LVDT and Current to

Pressure Converter 6 7 Measurement of electrical energy for

Domestic Appliances 6

2 Calibration of Ammeter, Voltmeter and Dynamometer type Power Factor Meter

6 8 Design an Instrumentation Amplifier having the gain range (10 – 1000),

R1 = 25 kΩ, R2 = 50 kΩ, Rf =

3

3 Measurement of resistance using Wheatstone Bridge and Kelvin Double

Bridge

3 9 Design 2 bit Flash type Analog to Digital converter and verify the output

3

4 Measurement of inductance using Maxwell’s Inductance Bridge and

capacitance using Schering Bridge

6 10 Design Digital to Analog converter for the value of resistance(R) ranging

from 1 kΩ - 25 kΩ using Weighted

3

5 Temperature measurement using RTD, Thermistor and Thermocouple

6 11 Mini Project

6 Measurement of Strain, Torque and Angular Displacement

3

Internal

Assessment Semester

End

Examination Preparation 10 15 Observation and Results 15 20 Record 10 - Mini-Project / Model Examination/

Viva-Voce

15

15

Total 50 50

11E409-AC Machines Laboratory

0 0 3 1.5

Objective To inculcate the knowledge of ac machines to the students.

To understand the performance characteristics of Synchronous motors, AC motors, single phase

motors and three phase motors as well as how to troubleshoot motors. To find the regulations of various synchronous generators, which help to enhance the technical skills of

students.

To conduct performance tests on AC motors. This is accomplished by determining the efficiencies of an

AC motors when operating under the assigned conditions.

Program Outcomes






Course Outcomes


1. Acquire knowledge of AC machines

2. Understand the performance of the AC motors

3. Determine the regulations of the synchronous generators.

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Dc machines and transformers Lab.

Assessment Pattern

List Of Experiments

1. Regulation of three phase alternator by EMF and MMF methods

2. Regulation of three phase alternator by ZPF and ASA method

3. Regulation of three phase salient pole alternator by slip test

4. V and Inverted V curves of Three Phase Synchronous Motor used in metal rolling mills

5. Load test on three phase induction motor used for centrifugal pumps

6. No load and blocked rotor test on three-phase induction motor

7. Separation of no load losses of three phase induction motor

8. Braking of induction motor used in Electric traction

9. Performance characteristics of single phase induction motor used in air compressors

10. Predetermination of performance of single phase induction motor

Mini Project

Total: 45 Hours

Practical Schedule

66

Sl. No.

Experiment Hours Sl. No.

Experiment Hours

1 Regulation of Alternator by various methods (EMF,MMF,ZPF,ASA)

12 4 Induction motor brakings 6

2 Various load test on 3 phase induction motor

9 5 No load and blocked rotor test

6

3 Induction motor loss calculation 6 6 V and Inverted V curves of Three Phase Synchronous

6

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model †

Semester End


Total 100 100 100 100

Objectives

11E501 ELECTRICAL MACHINE DESIGN 3 0 0 3.0

• To provide sound knowledge about constructional details and design of various electrical machines.

• To study MMF calculation and thermal rating of various types of electrical machines.

• To design armature and field systems for D.C. machines.

• To design core, yoke, windings and cooling systems of transformers

• To design stator and rotor of induction and synchronous machines.

Program Outcomes





or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health

and safety, cultural, societal and environmental considerations.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Analyze the MMF calculations, thermal rating, limitations, consideration, materials used &cooling

types of rotating machines 2. Design the main dimensions, armature core , field systems and commutator segments for D.C. machines

3. Design core, yoke, windings and cooling systems of transformers 4. Design stator and rotor of induction and synchronous machines

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in DC & AC machines. Assessment Pattern

Examination Examination

Unit I

Introduction Major Considerations – Limitations – MMF Calculation of various types of Electrical Machines – Net length of

Iron– real and apparent flux density of Rotating Machines – Temperature Gradient – Heat flow in two dimensions – Thermal resistivity of winding – Temperature gradient in conductors placed in Slots – Thermal rating - Direct and Indirect cooling methods - Basic concepts of Computer Aided Design.

Temperature gradient in conductors placed in Slots

Unit II

DC machines 9 Hours Design of Rotating Machines – D.C Machines output equations – Main Dimensions - Choice of Specific Loadings – Selection of number of Poles – Armature Design – Design of Field Poles & Field Coils - Design of Commutator

and Brushes.

68

Design of DC Machines commutator and brushes

Unit III

Transformers 9 Hours KVA output for single and three phase transformers – Window space factor – Overall dimensions –

Temperature rise of Transformers – Design of Tank with & without cooling tubes – Optimum design of transformers – Design of chokes – Design of CTs & PTs.

Temperature rise of Transformers

Unit IV

Induction Motors 9 Hours

Magnetic leakage calculations – Leakage reactance of polyphase Machines- Magnetizing Current – Output

equation of Induction Motor – Main dimensions – Length of air gap- Rules for selecting rotor slots of

Squirrel Cage Machines – Design of Rotor bars & slots – Design of End Rings – Design of Wound Rotor -

Relation between D & L for best Power Factor.

Relation between D & L for best power factor

Unit V

Synchronous machines 9 Hours

Runaway speed – output equations – choice of loadings – Design of salient pole machines – Short circuit

ratio – shape of pole face – Armature design – Armature parameters – Estimation of air gap length – Design of

rotor – Design of damper winding – Determination of full load field mmf – Design of field winding – Design of

turbo alternators – Rotor design.

Design of rotor in turbo alternators

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. A.K. Sawhney, A Course in Electrical Machine Design, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2010.

Reference(s)

1. S.K.Sen, Principles of Electrical Machine Designs with Computer Programmes, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006

2. R.K. Agarwal, Principles of Electrical Machine Design, Kataria S K and Sons, New Delhi, 2010 3. V.N. Mittle V N and Mittle A, Design of Electrical Machines, Standard Publications and

Distributors, New Delhi, 2009

11E502 POWER SYSTEM II

3 1 0 3.5

Objectives

• To understand the recent trends in power systems and to understand the pu system

• To understand the load flow studies

• To study the different types of faults and to perform fault analysis

• To understand the power system economics and power system stability Program Outcomes







PO12: An ability to recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in

ndependent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Compute the power system parameters in pu systems and application of those concepts for

load flow analysis and economic load dispatch 2. Analyze the different types of faults and transients 3. Differentiate steady state and transient stability issues.

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in power sysytems I.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model

Examination†



Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Power System Modeling Single line diagrams – Per unit system – Per unit impedance/ reactance diagrams – Formation of network matrices

–Y bus formation using inspection and singular transformation – Z bus formation using step-by-step building algorithm method.

Per unit systems

Unit II 9 Hours

Load Flow Analysis Load flow equations and methods of solution – Slack bus concept – Gauss Seidal, Newton Raphson, Fast decoupled methods for load flow studies – Comparison.

Slack bus concepts 9 Hours

Unit III

Fault Analysis Types of faults – Balanced three phase fault – Circuit transients and short circuit capacity – Systematic fault analysis using bus impedance matrix – Fundamentals of symmetrical components – Sequence

impedances – Sequence networks – Unbalanced faults - Single line to ground fault – Line fault – Double

line to ground fault.

70

Fundamentals of symmetrical components 9 Hours

Unit IV

Power System Transients

Source of transients - various types of power systems transients - Causes of over voltage - lightning phenomenon,charge formation in the clouds, mechanisms of lighting strokes, characteristics of lightning

strokes - Resistance switching - Traveling wave concept - Voltage transients on closing and reclosing lines, capacitor switching - over voltage induced by faults. Voltage transients on closing and reclosing lines, capacitor switching

Unit V

Power System Stability Steady state and transient stability – Swing equation and its solution by its methods (step by step) – Multimachine system-Equal area criterion – Factors affecting stability and methods of improving stability.

9 Hours

Factors affecting stability and methods of improving stability 9 Hours

Textbook(s)

1. I.J. Nagarath, D.P. Kothari, Modern Power System Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi,2011. 2. Abhijit Chakrabarti Sunita Halder Power System Analysis Operation and control, PHI Learning New

delhi, 2010.

Reference(s) 1. Hadi Saadat, Power System Analysis, PSA Publishing , New Delhi, 2010 2. G.W. Stagg, and El-Abaid, A. H., Computer Methods in Power System Analysis, McGraw-Hill InternationalBook Company, New York, 2007

3. P.Kundur, Power System Stability and Control, Tata McGraw Hill Book Company, New Delhi, 2009

4. M.A. Pai, Computer Techniques in Power System Analysis, The McGraw Hill companies, NewDelhi,

2006

6. C.L.Wadha, Electric Power Systems, New Age Publications,2009.

.

Objectives

11E503 POWER ELECTRONICS

3 0 0 3.0

• Obtain the switching characteristic of different types of power semi-conductor devices.

• Determine the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers.

• Apply switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators.

Program Outcomes







PO12: An ability to recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in

ndependent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change Course Outcomes


1. Analyze and select the appropriate power semiconductor switches for power electronic circuits.

2. Examine the operation, characteristics and performance of controlled rectifiers and choppers. 3. Apply and analysis various topologies of inverters and AC-AC converters

Prerequsite


Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model

Examination†

Semester End

Examination


Total 100 100 100 100

Unit – I

Power Semi-Conductor Devices Construction, Operation, Characteristics of Power Diode – DIAC- SCR - TRIAC – Power transistor, MOSFET and IGBT – Ratings of SCR – Series parallel operation of SCR, di/dt & dv/dt protection. di/dt & dv/dt protection

Unit – II 9 Hours

Controlled Rectifiers Single Phase and Three phase uncontrolled converter with R load – Single Phase and Three phase half and fully controlled converters with R, RL, RLE Load – Single phase and Three phase dual converter

operation – Effect of source inductance.

Effect of source inductance in single phase converters 9 Hours

72

Unit-III

Choppers

Principle of chopper operations-control strategies – Step up and step down chopper – Multi phase choppers –

Operation of voltage, current commutated choppers, switched mode regulators – Buck, boost, buck boost, cuk

regulators.

Operation four quadrant chopper 9 Hours

Unit – IV

Inverters Single phase and three phase (both 120

0 mode and 180

0 mode) inverters – PWM techniques: Sinusoidal

PWM,modified sinusoidal PWM and multiple PWM – Current source inverters – Voltage source inverter – UPS.

UPS 9 Hours

Unit – V

AC-AC Converters

AC Voltage controllers – Principle of sequence and phase control – Single and Three phase AC voltage

controller with R load.– Cycloconverter – Single phase Cycloconverter – Step up and step down – Voltage equation – Three phase Cycloconverters.

Three phase AC voltage controller with RL load 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook 1. Muhammad H. Rashid, “Power Electronics – Circuits, Devices & Applications”, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi, 2005.

References 1. M.D Singh & K.B Khanchandani. “Power Electronics” Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2008. 2. Dr.P.S Bhimbra.., “Power Electronics” Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2008

3. Ned Mohan, Tore.M.Undeland, William.P.Robbins, “Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and

Design”, Wiley India, New Delhi, 2011.

4. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcoursecontents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Power%20Electronics/New_index1.ht

ml

Objectives

11E504 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS

3 0 0 3.0

• To introduce microprocessors and basics of system design using microprocessors.

• To introduce h/w architecture, instruction set and programming of 8085 microprocessor.

• To introduce the h/w architecture, instruction set and programming of 8086 microprocessor.

• To introduce the peripheral interfacing of microprocessors.

• To introduce through case studies, the system design principles using 8085, 8086 and 8051.

• To introduce the h/w architecture, instruction set, programming and interfacing of 8051 microcontroller. Program Outcomes


including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations

PO6: An ability to apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal

and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Analyze the various interfacing components used in the microprocessor applying the basic concepts. 2. Write the assembly language for microcontroller applying the basic concepts 3. Illustrate the advanced Intel processor for various modes of operation.

Prerequsite

• Require knowledge in Digital logic circuits.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model Examination

†

Semester End

Examination


Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Processor and Programming Functional block diagram - Signals – Memory interfacing – I/O ports and data transfer concepts – Timing Diagram – Interrupt structure. Instruction format and addressing modes – Assembly language format – Data transfer, data manipulation & control instructions – Programming: Loop structure with counting & Indexing - Look up table - Subroutine instructions stack.

Subroutine instructions stack 9 Hours

Unit II

Peripheral Interfacing

Study of Architecture and Programming of ICs: 8255 PPI, 8259 PIC, 8251 USART, 8279 Key board display controller and 8253 Timer/ Counter – Interfacing with 8085 - A/D and D/A converter interfacing.

Keyboard interface 9 Hours

Unit III

PIC Microcontroller - Architecture

P16F877 Architecture and instruction set – Program and Data memory – CPU registers – I/O port expansion – Interrupts – Programming concepts in Assembly and Embedded C.

Embedded C 9 Hours

Unit IV PIC Microcontroller - Peripherals

Timer0 – Timer 1 - Compare and Capture mode –– Timer 2 – PWM outputs – I2C operation – ADC – UART.

74

UART 9 Hours

Unit V

Embedded Applications Stepper Motor Control – DC Motor Control- AC Power Control- Interfacing with LED’s -Pushbuttons - Relays – Latches – Keypad matrix – 7 Segment display – LCD – ADC –DAC –Industrial applications of microcontrollers.

Keypad matrix – 7 Segment display 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours Textbook(s)

1. R.S. Gaonkar , Microprocessor Architecture Programming and Application, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2001

2. Ajay V Deshmukh , Microcontrollers Theory and Applications, Tata Mcgraw Hill publishing company Limited,

New Delhi,2006

Reference(s)

1. Ajoy Kumar Ray and K.M.Bhurchandi Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals Tata Mraw Hill, 2006. 2. John. B. Peatman, “Design with PIC Microcontrollers”, Pearson Education, 2004.

3. Milan Verla “PIC Microcontrollers” Mikroelectronika 1st Edition, 2008

4. Tim Wilmshurst, “Designing Embedded Systems with PIC Microcontrollers: Principles and Applications” Newness

Publisher-2007.

11E505 SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To study the construction and operating principle of various types of special electrical machines

• To study the speed torque characteristics of various special electrical machines

• To study the performance of different types of special electrical machines

Program Outcomes



limitations

PO7: An ability to understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental

contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Illustrate the construction and operating principle of various types of special electrical machines. 2. Analyze the speed torque characteristics and operation of power converters of various special electrical

machines. 3. Evaluate the EMF and torque equations of various special electrical machines

Prerequsite • Require knowledge in electrical machines and power electronic circuits.

Assessment Pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model




Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Synchronous Reluctance Motors

Constructional features – Types – Axial and radial air gap motors – Operating principle – Reluctance – Phasor diagram - Characteristics – Electronic controller - Vernier motor- Applications.

Vernier motor 9 Hours

Unit II

Stepping Motors

Constructional features – Principle of operation – Variable reluctance motor – Hybrid motor – Single and multi stack configurations – Theory of torque predictions – Linear and non-linear analysis – Characteristics – Power and Drive circuits.

Power and Drive circuits 9 Hours

Unit III

Switched Reluctance Motors

Constructional features – Principle of operation – Torque prediction – Power controllers – Non-linear analysis - Characteristics – Computer control - Applications.

Computer control 9 Hours

Unit IV

Permanent Magnet Machines

76

Internal


Examination Preparation 10 15 Observation and Results 15 20 Record 10 -

Permanent magnet materials and their characteristics - Principle of operation – EMF and torque equations – Power controllers -

Converter - Volt-ampere requirements – Torque speed characteristics.

Torque speed characteristics 9 Hours

Unit V

Permanent Magnet Brushless DC Motors

Principle of operation – Types – Magnetic circuit analysis – EMF and torque equations – Power controllers – Electronic Commutator – Motor characteristics and control.

Motor characteristics and control 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook(s)

1. Miller T J E, “Brushless Permanent Magnet and Reluctance Motor Drives”, Clarendon Press,Oxford, 1989.

Reference(s)

1. Paul Acarnley P P, “Stepping Motors – A Guide to Motor Theory and Practice”, Peter Perengrinus,London, 2007

2. Kenjo T, “Stepping Motors and Their Microprocessor Controls”, Clarendon Press London, 1994.

3. Kenjo T and Nagamori S, “Permanent Magnet and Brushless DC Motors”, Clarendon Press,London, 1985.

Objectives

11E507 LINEAR AND DIGITAL IC LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5

• To familiarize students with the gates, Flip-Flops and Counters.

• To assist students with understanding of the linear combinational circuit with both AC and DC operations

of operational amplifier.

• To reinforce the concept of filters 555 timer and voltage regulators.

• To acquaint students with analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog converters.

Program Outcomes


that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, cultural,

societal and environmental considerations.


including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations Course Outcomes


1. Acquire knowledge on principles and applications of various IC’s 2. Designing of various circuits using those IC’s 3. Design various filters & generate the waveform using op-amps

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in Linear and Digital Ic.

Assessment Pattern

Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15 Total 50 50

List of Experiments 1. Implementation of three variable Boolean Functions using Adder/ Subtractor circuits, Excess 3, 2s Complement, Parity

generator and parity checker.

2. Implementation of Encoders, Decoders, Multiplexer, Demultiplexer and Code converters

3. Design of asynchronous (Mod 6, Mod 10) and synchronous (binary, up/down, BCD, ripple and Johnson) counters.

4. Design of SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO and Bidirectional Shift Registers.

5. Design and Simulation of Voltage doubler circuit for a 6V - 12 V input using NE555 and power follower circuit with

300mA - 500 mA output capability using LM 317

6. Application of Op-Amp. (Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier, summer, Comparator, Integrator and Differentiator).

7. Analog to Digital Converter with 3 bit output and 4 bit Digital to Analog Converter.

8. Design and Simulation of PWM pulse generation with 1 KHz – 5 KHz analog signal using IC 741and IC 555.

9. Design and implementation of Dual power supply voltage regulators for a voltage range of ±5V to ±9V using 7805

and 7909.

10. Design and Simulation of LPF, HPF for a 2 KHz cut off frequency, BPF for a 2-10 KHz pass frequency range and also generate triangular and saw tooth waveform using Op-Amp.

Mini Project

Total: 45 Hours

Practical schedule


1 Implementation of Boolean Functions

using Adder/ Subtractor circuits, Code converters, Parity generator and

parity checker, Excess 3, 2s

Complement, Binary to grey code ,

Encoders, Decoders, Multiplexer,

Demultiplexer and Magnitude

Comparators.

12 4 Application of Op-Amp.

(Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier, summer, Comparator,

Integrater and Differentiator).

9

2 Design of asynchronous , synchronous

counters and shift registers 6 5 Design and implementation of

voltage regulators using 78xx, 79xx and LM 317.

6

3 Design and Simulation of astable and

monostable multivibrators using 555 Timer.

6 6 Design and Simulation of LPF, HPF

, BPF and waveform generators using Op-Amp.

6

Mini Project

78

Objectives

11E508 POWER ELECTRONICS LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5

• To obtain the switching characteristic of different types of power semi-conductor devices.

• To determine the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers.

Program outcomes




PO9: An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary

settings.

PO12: An ability to recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in ndependent and life-

long learning in the broadest context of technological change Course Outcomes


1. Analyze the power electronic devices and circuits for different energy conversion applications 2. Understand and select the suitable power switch for energy conversion application 3. Analyze the various power electronics devices by using PSIM / MATLAB

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in measurement and instrumentation Lab.

Assessment pattern

Internal



Total 50 50

List of experiments

1. Experimental verification and simulation of single phase half and fully controlled converters and measure harmonics.

2. Experimental verification and simulation of three phase half and fully controlled Converters and measure harmonics.

3. Design of series inverter for symmetrical and asymmetrical mode of operation.

4. Design and verification of current commutated chopper for various values of duty cycle.

5. Design and verification of voltage commutated chopper for various values of duty cycle.

6. Four quadrant operation of dc motor using chopper.

7. Single phase and three phase PWM inverters.

8. Generation of firing pulse using UJT for single phase half and fully controlled converters.

9. Experimental verification and simulation of single phase AC voltage controller using PSIM/MATLAB.

10. Experimental verification and simulation of single phase cycloconverter PSIM/MATLAB.

Mini Project

Practical schedule

Total: 45 hours

Sl. No. Experiment Hours

1 Experimental verification and simulation of converters 12

2 Design of series inverter and three phase PWM inverters 6

3 Design and verification of chopper 12

4 Firing pulse generation 6

5 AC voltage controller and cyclo converter 9

80

Internal



Total 50 50

11E509 MICROPROCESSOR BASED SYSTEM DESIGN LABORATORY

Objectives

• To write the assembly language programming

0 0 3 1.5

• To write programs for various problems and generate the necessary signals to operate and control

any system.

Program Outcomes

PO5: An ability to create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering

tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of

the limitations.


contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Write programs for different applications 2. Understand and analyze the interfacing concepts 3. Design the circuits by using PIC microcontroller for various applications.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in Digital Logic Circuits.

Assessment Pattern

List of Experiments 8-bit Microprocessor

1. 1. Simple arithmetic operations:

Multi precision addition / subtraction / multiplication / division.

2. Programming with control instructions:

Increment / Decrement.

Ascending / Descending order.

Maximum / Minimum of numbers.

Rotate instructions.

Hex / ASCII / BCD code conversions.

3. Interface Experiments:

A/D Interfacing.

D/A Interfacing.

Traffic light controller.

Key board. And Display

Timer 4. Design the suitable circuit for communication with PIC controller

5. Design the temperature controller using LM 37 in PIC controller

6. Design the decrement counter using seven segment display using PIC controller

7. Design the suitable circuit to display the Character “EEE DEPT” in LCD Display

8. Design the suitable circuit for unipolar and Bipolar stepper motor in half and full step configuration

9. Design the suitable circuit for servo motor for various position angle using PIC controller

Mini Project

Practical Schedule Total: 45 Hours

Sl. No. Experiment Hours

1 Hands on training for developing general structure for

program, algorithm and flowchart

10

2 Writing Assembly the program 10

3 Writing and debugging the programs for all ALU operations

10

4 Interfacing to real world 5

5 Introduction and developing the C Code 5

6 Programming the intel processors using DOS Turbo

Compiler

5

11E510 Technical Seminar I

0 0 2 1

Programme Outcomes

PO10: An ability to communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering

community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design

documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.

Course Outcomes

CO1: Discuss innovative topics in a team

CO2: Present emerging technologies

82

11E601 SOLID STATE DRIVES

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To analyze the steady-state operation and transient in dynamics of machines.

• To understand the operation of the converter, chopper fed dc drive and solve simple problems.

• To analyze the operation of both classical and modern induction motor drives and their characteristics.

• To study the basics of power electronic drive systems

Program Outcomes






PO12: An ability to recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in ndependent and life-

long learning in the broadest context of technological change Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Analyze the steady-state operation and dynamics of electrical drives. 2. Examine the operation of solid state control of DC and AC drives and to compute the electrical

quantitites. 3. Analyze the operation of digital speed control and selection of drives for various applications.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in power electronics and machines.

Assessment Pattern


† Model

Examination†

Semester End



Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Fundamentals of Electric Drives

Electric Drives – Drive classifications – Advantage of Electric Drives – Equations governing motor load dynamics – Equilibrium operating point and its steady state stability – Mathematical condition for steady state stability and problems- Selection of drives – Determination of motor rating – Multiquadrant operation.

Multiquadrant operation 9Hours

Unit II

DC Drives DC motor and their performance-Braking – Steady state analysis – Controlled rectifier fed DC drives – Chopper controlled DC drives – Time ratio control and current limit control – Four quadrant operation – Effect of ripples on the DC motor performance.

Effect of ripples in dc motor performance 9 Hours

Unit III

Induction Motor Drives Stator control- Steady state analysis - Stator voltage and frequency control –V/F control – Closed loop control of Voltage Source Inverter, Current Source Inverter and cycloconverter fed induction motor drives – Rotor control – Rotor resistance control and slip power recover y schemes- Subsynchronous and super synchronous operation – Closed loop speed control.

Super synchronous speed control 9 Hours

Unit IV

Synchronous Motor Drives Types of synchronous Motors – Adjustable frequency and controlled current operation – Open loop v/f control –

Self controlled synchronous motor – Closed loop control of Voltage Source Inverter, Current Source Inverter and cycloconverter fed synchronous motor drives – Margin angle control and power factor control – Brushless

excitation.

Margine angle control and power factor control 9 Hours

Unit V

Applications Selection of drives and control schemes for steel rolling mills, paper mills, lifts and cranes, sugar mills, Shipping &

Aeronautical-Microcomputer based control of drives-PLL, PID based control of drives.

PLL, PID based control of drives 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours Textbook(s)

1. G.K.Dubey.G, Fundamental of Electrical Drives, Narosa publishing House, New Delhi 1995. 2. Vedam Subramanyan, Electric Drives: Concepts and Applications, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Combany, New Delhi, 2010.

Reference(s)

1. J.M.D.Murphy and F.G. `Turnbull, Thyristor control of AC Motors, Pergamon Press, New Delhi 1988. 2. Vedam Subramanyan, Thyristor control of Electrical Drives, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Combany,

New Delhi 1996.

3. Krishan.R, Electtric Motor & Drives Modelling, Analysis and Control, Prentice hall of India,New Delhi,

2001

4. Gaekward, Analog and Digital control systems, Wiley Eastern Ltd, New Delhi 1989.

84


† Model

Examination†

Semester End



Total 100 100 100 100

11E602 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To design and analyze the interaction that the various components within an embedded system have with each other.

• To interface between processors & peripheral devices related to embedded processing.

• To design and formulate efficient programs on any dedicated processor.

• Apply the basic concepts of systems programming like operating system, assembler compliers etc and the

management task needed for developing embedded system.

Program Outcomes



the limitations.



Course Outcomes


1. Identify the hardware components that can be apart of an embedded system and that influence the choice of the programming model used

2. Develop and debug simple computer programs for embedded system where the commutation with the environment is done directly via the peripheral devices

3. Understand,program and implement an embedded system Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in microprocessor.

Assessment Pattern

Unit I

Introduction Embedded Systems evolution trends – Embedded system design process – micro controller architecture –PIC 16 series- Program and Data memory – CPU registers – instruction set – I/O ports – External Interrupts – Timer 0 - RB0/INT – Timer1 – Compare and Capture mode – Timer 2 – PWM outputs – ADC- SCI.

UART - SPI – PSP - I2C operation

Unit II

Real Time Operating Systems (RTOS)

9 Hours

Basic real time concepts- Real time design issues - The Shared data problem – Software architectures – Real time specifications - real time kernels – inter task communications and synchronizations.

Real time memory management

Unit III

System Performance, Analysis and Optimization 9 Hours Response time calculation – interrupt latency – time loading and its measurement –scheduling – reducing response

times and time loading – analysis of memory requirements – reducing memory loading – input – output

performance.

Analysis of memory requirements 9 Hours

Unit IV

Debugging Techniques AND Development Tools Faults, failures, bugs and effects- reliability – testing – fault tolerance- host and target machines – linker/locators for embedded software – getting embedded software in to target system - Debugging strategies, Simulators-Logic

Analyze In Circuit Debugger and In Circuit Emulator 9 Hours

Unit V

Embedded System Applications Networks for embedded systems – Elevator controller – Telephone PBX – Personal digital assistants – Set top Boxes - Real time systems as complex systems – real time databases – real time image processing - An example:

The tank monitoring system.

Case Study : Embedded based Automobile control system.

Textbook(s)

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

1. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as Components: Principles of Embedded Computer Systems Design”, Morgan

Kaufman Publishers, 2004. 2. John. B. Peatman, “Design with PIC Microcontrollers”, Pearson Education, 2004

Reference(s)

1. Philip A.Laplante, “Real Time Systems Design and Analysis: An Engineers Handbook”, II Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2000.

2. David E Simon, " An embedded software primer ", Pearson education Asia, 2001

3. Raymond J.A. Bhur and Donald L.Bialey, “An Introduction to Real Time Systems: From Design to

Networking with C/C++”, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1999.

4. C.M.Krishna and Kang G.Shin, “Real Time Systems”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1997

86

Objectives

11E603 POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL

3 1 0 3.5

• To get an overview of system operation and control.

• To understand & model power-frequency dynamics and to design power-frequency controller.

• To understand & model reactive power-voltage interaction and different methods of control for maintaining voltage

profile against varying system load.

Program Outcomes






limitations

PO6: An ability to apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety,

legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering

practice

Course Outcomes


1. Apply the load forecasting tools to predict the future demand and to plan the optimum generation schedule.

2. Analyze the static and dynamic response of isolated and interconnected generating units 3. Relate the functions of LDCs at different hierarchical levels

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in power system I.

Assessment Pattern


† Model

Examination†

Semester End

1 Remember 10 10 10 x m1 n i 2 Understand 20 20 20 n 2


Total 100 100 100 1

Unit I

Introduction System load variation: System load characteristics, load curves – Load-duration curve, load factor and diversity

factor. Reserve requirements: Installed reserves, spinning reserves, cold reserves and hot reserves. Overview of system operation: Load forecasting, unit commitment and load dispatching. Overview of system control – Need for

voltage and frequency regulation in power system – Plant level and System level controls

Plant level and System level controls

Unit II

Real Power - Frequency Control

9 Hours

Fundamentals of speed governing mechanism and modeling: Speed-load characteristics – Load sharing between

two synchronous machines in parallel; concept of control area, LFC control of a single-area system: Static and

dynamic analysis of uncontrolled and controlled cases, Economic dispatch control. Multi-area systems: T wo-area

system modeling; static analysis, uncontrolled case; tie line with frequency bias control of two-area system

derivation, state variable model.

Multi-area systems

9 Hours

Unit III Reactive Power–Voltage Control Typical excitation system, modeling, static and dynamic analysis, stability compensation; generation and absorption of reactive power: Relation between voltage, power and reactive power at a node; method of voltage

control: Injection of reactive power. Tap-changing transformer, tap setting of OLTC transformer, static VAR system, System level control using generator voltage magnitude setting and MVAR injection of switched

capacitors to maintain acceptable voltage profile and to minimize transmission loss.

Tap setting of OLTC transformer

9 Hours

Unit IV

Unit Commitment Statement of Unit Commitment (UC) problem; constraints in UC: spinning reserve, thermal unit constraints, hydro constraints, fuel constraints and other constraints; UC solution methods: Priority-list methods, forward dynamic programming approach, numerical problems only in priority-list method using full-load average production cost

Forward dynamic programming approach 9 Hours

Unit V

Computer Control Of Power Systems Energy control centre: Functions – Monitoring, data acquisition and control. System hardware configuration –

SCADA and EMS functions: Network topology determination, state estimation, security analysis and control.

Various operating states: Normal, alert, emergency, in extremis and restorative. State transition diagram showing

various state transitions and control strategies.

EMS functions 9 Hours

Textbook(s)

Total: 45 + 15 Hours

1. Olle. I. Elgerd, “Electric Energy Systems Theory”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi, Second Edition, 30th reprint 2008

2. Allen.J.Wood and Bruce F.Wollenberg “Power Generation, Operation and Control”, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York 2006

3 P.Kundur, “Power System Stability and Control”, McGraw Hill Publishing Co, New York, 2009

Reference(s) 1. D P Kothari and I J Nagrath, “Modern Power System Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Co, New Delhi, 2011

2. L L Grigsby, “The Electric Power Engineering Hand Book”, CRC Press & IEEE Press, 2001

88

S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version) Test I

† Test II†

Model

Examination†

Semester End



Total 100 100 100 100

Objectives

11E604 POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION AND SWITCH GEAR

3 0 0 3.0

• To estimate the fault currents and fault MVA for different types of faults.

• To apply the different types of relays and schemes for protection of power system components.

• To understand the performance of circuit breakers during fault conditions.

Program Outcomes






Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to:

1. Categorize the fault and determine the fault current using appropriate method. 2. Protect the power system and its apparatus with various protection schemes and relays. 3. Recognize the arc quenching phenomena, the protection against over voltages and the various types of

the circuit breakers used in power systems. Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in power system I.

Assessment Pattern

Unit I

Introduction to protective system Principles and need for protective schemes – Nature and causes of faults – Types of faults – Symmetrical components and its applications to fault analysis – Power system earthing – Step and Touch potential - Zones of

protection.

Characteristic function of protective relays 9 Hours

Unit II

Protective Relays Definition – Requirement of relays – Universal torque equation – Non directional and directional over current relays – Distance relays – Impedance, mho and reactance relays – Differential, pilot and negative sequence relays – Under frequency relays – Static relays.

Static relays

Unit III

Apparatus and Line Protection

9 Hours

Alternator, transformer, motor, busbar and feeder protection - CTs and PTs and their applications in protection schemes – Microprocessor based protective schemes.

CTs and PTs and their applications in protection schemes 9 Hours

Unit IV

Theory of Circuit Interruption Physics of arc phenomena and arc interruption. Restriking voltage & Recover y voltage, rate of rise of recover y

voltage, resistance switching, current chopping, and interruption of capacitive current – DC circuit breaking.

Auto re-closing

9 Hours

Unit V

Circuit Breakers Types of Circuit Breakers – Air blast, Air break, oil, SF6 and Vacuum circuit breakers –merits and demerits – HVDC breakers - Testing of circuit breakers. Testing of circuit breakers 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook(s)

1. Sunil S. Rao, “Switchgear and Protection”, Khanna publishers, New Delhi,

12th Edition, Reprint 2008.

Reference(s)

1. Wadhwa C L, “Electrical Power Systems”, Newage International (P) Ltd., Sixth Edition, 2010.

2. Ravindranath B, and Chander N, “Power System Protection & Switchgear”, Newage International (P) Ltd., Reprint, 2009.

3. Soni M L, Gupta P V, Bhatnagar V S, Chakrabarti A, “A Text Book on Power System Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai & Co., 3rd

Edition, 2000.

4. Bhuvanesh Oza, Nirmalkumar Nair, Rashesh Mehta, Vijay Makwana, “Power System Protection and Switchgear”, Tata

McGraw hill, First Edition, 2010.

5. Ravindra P. Singh, “Switchgear and Power System Protection”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

90

11E605 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

Objectives

• To the course aims to introduce the system and analyzing discrete time signals & systems in the time and

frequency domain.

• To design filters and their design for digital implementation

• Apply to engineering application programmable digital signal processor & quantization effects.

Program Outcomes

3 1 0 3.5




PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods incl uding design of experiments, analysis and



1. Compute FFT algorithms and their applications in linear filtering 2. Design digital filters using different techniques 3. Illustrate the processor TMS320C24xx and its application to electrical engineering.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in Digital logic circuits.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model Examination

†

Semester End

Examination


Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction Classification of systems: Continuous, discrete, , causal, stable, dynamic, recursive, time variance;

classification of signals: continuous and discrete, energy and power; mathematical representation of signals; spectral

density; sampling techniques, quantization, quantization error, Nyquist rate, aliasing effect.

Basic signal step, ramp, exponential and impulse, convolution of two signals

Unit II

Discrete Time System Analysis

9 Hours

Z-transform and its properties, inverse z-transforms; difference equation – Solution by z-transform, application to discrete systems - Stability analysis, ROC concepts – Convolution, Correlation.

Fourier transform and its properties of Discrete Time Signals.

Unit III

Discrete Fourier Transform & Computation 9 Hours DTFT, DFT properties, magnitude and phase representation - Computation of DFT using FFT algorithm – DIT &

DIF - FFT using radix 2 – Butterfly structure. Use of FFT algorithms in Linear Filtering and correlation.

Circular convolution, relation between linear and circular convolution

UNIT IV

Design of Digital Filters

9 Hours

IIR design: Analog filter design - Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations; digital design using impulse invariant and bilinear transformation - Warping, prewarping - Frequency transformation.

FIR & IIR filter realization – Parallel & cascade forms. FIR design: Windowing Techniques – Rectangular, Raised

cosine, Kaiser Windows, Blackmann – Linear phase characteristics.

Direct form realization of FIR and IIR filter

9 Hours

Unit V Programmable DSP Chips & Case Studies Architecture and features of TMS 320F2400 signal processing chip – Quantization effects in designing digital filters. DSP based Electrical drives – Induction Motors and special Electrical machines – DSP controllers for Non-

conventional energy sources.

Instruction sets and simple programs for TMS320F2400, MCB,MBCB, MCCB, RCCB, ELCB 9 Hours

Total: 45+15 Hours Textbook(s)

John G Proakis, Dimtris G Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and Application”, Prentice Hall of

India Ltd, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2006.

References(s)

1. Venkataramani B and Bhaskar M, “Digital Signal Processor Architecture”, Programming and Application, Prentice Hall of

India Ltd, 3rd Edition, New Delhi. 2007

2. Alan V Oppenheim, Ronald W Schafer, John R Back, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, 3rd

Edition, New Delhi, 2009.

3. Avtar singh, Srinivasan S, “DSP Implementation using DSP microprocessor with Examples”, from TMS32C54XX -

Thamson / Brooks cole Publishers, 2003

4. Salivahanan S, Vallavaraj A and Gnanapriya, “Digital Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2000

5. Johny Johnson R, “Introduction to Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 1st edition 2009.

6. Mitra S K, “Digital Signal Processing- A Computer based approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Ltd, New Delhi 4th Edition, 2011.

92

11E607 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5

Objectives

• To design and analyze the interaction that the various components within an embedded system have with

each other.

• To interface between processors & peripheral devices related to embedded processing.

• To design and formulate efficient programs on any dedicated processor.

• Apply the basic concepts of systems programming like operating system, assembler compilers etc and the

management task needed for developing embedded system.

Program Outcomes



the limitations.



Course Outcomes


1. Identify the hardware components that can be apart of an embedded system and that influence the choice of the programming model used

2. Develop and debug simple computer programs for embedded system where the commutation with the

environment is done directly via the peripheral devices

3. Design and simulate various circuits by using verilog and microcontroller.

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in microprocessor lab.

Assessment Pattern




Total 50 50

List Of Experiments 1. 1. Demonstration of basic instructions with 8051 Micro controller execution, including

i. Conditional jumps, looping

ii. Calling subroutines

iii. Stack parameter testing

2. Programming Exercise on

i. RAM direct addressing

ii. Bit addressing

3. Parallel port programming with 8051 using port 1 facility

4. Interface unipolar Stepper motor with 8051microcontroller

5. Interface ADC & DAC with 8051microcontroller

6. Design and simulate 2, 4, 8… 2n bit Ripple carry adder using VHDL

7. Design and simulate 2, 4, 8… 2n bit ALU by using VHDL

8. Design and simulate2:1, 4:1, 8:1 & 16:1 multiplexer using Verilog

9. Design and simulate 2, 4, 8… 2n bit adder using Verilog

Mini Project Total: 45 Hours

Practical Schedule

Sl. No.

Experiment Hours Sl. No.

Experiment Hours

1 Demonstration of basic instructions with 8051 Micro controller execution, including 1. Conditional jumps, looping 2. Calling subroutines 3. Stack parameter testing

3 5 Interface ADC & DAC with 8051microcontroller

3

2 Programming Exercise on 1. RAM direct addressing

2. Bit addressing

3 6 Design and simulate 2, 4, 8… 2n bit Ripple carry adder using V

3

3 Parallel port programming with 8051 using port 1 facility

3 7 Design and simulate 2, 4, 8… 2n bit ALU by using VHDL

3

8 Design and simulate2:1, 4:1, 8:1 & 16:1 multiplexer using Verilog

6

4 Interface unipolar Stepper motor with 8051microcontroller

3 9 Design and simulate 2, 4, 8… 2n bit adder using Verilog

3

10 Mini Project

94

11E608 CONTROL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

0 0 3 1 . 5

Objectives

• To acquire software development skills and experience in the usage of standard packages necessary for

analysis.

• To knowledge about simulation of control system required for its planning, operation and control.

Program Outcomes







including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Understand Basic knowledge on control system Knowledge on simulation of control system required for its planning and

control

2. Design the feedback loop to achieve the desired output

3. Investigate servo motor speed and position control principles.

Prerequsite Require basic knowledge in Electrical machines lab.

Assessment Pattern




Total 50 50

List of Experiments 1. Determination of transfer function of armature controlled DC motor. 2. Determination of transfer function of field controlled DC motor.

3. Determination of transfer function of AC servo motor.

4. Design and simulation of SISO transfer function with non linearity.

5. Design and simulation of transfer function of Type – 0 and Type – 1 systems for different input signals.

6. Design and simulate time response of a linear system whose damping ratio must be between 0.4 and 0.8.

7. Design and simulate frequency response of a lead network.

8. Performance evaluation of P,PI and PID controllers.

9. Stability analysis of linear systems simulation

a) Study of Characteristics of synchros.

b) Study of stepper motor.

10. Design and simulate three types of compensators for system stability whose Velocity error constant should be greater

than or equal to 50.

Mini Project

Total: 45 Hours

Practical Schedule

Sl. No. Experiment Hours Sl. No. Experiment Hours 1 Determination of transfer function of

armature controlled DC motor. 6 8 Design P,PI and PID controller and

evaluate their performances,using first

order system.

3

2

Determination of transfer function of field controlled DC motor.

6

9

Stability analysis of linear systems simulation

6

3 Determination of transfer function of

AC servo motor.

3

10 a) Characteristics of synchros

b) Study of stepper motor. 3

4 Digital simulation of systems with nonlinearity.

3 11

Lead Compensator design simulation

3

5

Analog and Digital simulation of Type- 0 and Type-1 system.

3

12

Lag Compensator design simulation

3

6 Time response analysis simulation. 3 13 Lead-Lag Compensator design

simulation

3

7 Frequency response analysis simulation.

3

11E609 Technical Seminar II

0 0 2 1

Programme Outcomes

PO10: An ability to communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and

with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make

effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.

Course Outcomes

CO1: Discuss innovative topics in a team

CO2: Present emerging technologies

96

11O701 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS (Common to all branches) 3 0 0 3

Objectives

• To understand the basics of Micro and Macro Economics.

• To understand the methods by which Demand Forecasting, Cost Analysis, Pricing and Financial

• Accounting are done in the Industry.

Programme Outcomes

PO11:An ability to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management principles and

apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary

environments.

PO12:An ability to recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-long

learning in the broadest context of technological change

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Analyze the economic systems and different forecasting methods.

2. Unde r s t andCost and break even points analysis

3. Evaluate pricing methods in different market structure and appraise the financial system

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in Mathematics.

Assessment pattern

S.

No.

†

†

Model

Examination†

Semester End

Examination

1 Remember T 2s0 T 2s0 20 20 2 Understand 20 20 20 20

3 Apply 20 30 30 30 4 Analyze/ Evaluate 30 20 20 20 5 Create 10 10 10 10

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit - I

Introduction

Introduction to Economics, Kinds of Economic Systems, Production Possibility Frontier, Opportunity Cost,Objective of

Organizations, Kinds of Organizations, Business Decision Making,

Legal rights and responsibilities of types of Organizations.

Unit – II

Demand and Supply

9 Hours

Functions of Demand & Supply, Law of Demand and Supply, Elasticity of Demand, Demand Forecasting Methods,

Price Equilibrium

Role of logistics in managing supply and demand.

Unit - III

Production and Cost

9 Hours

Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech. | Regulation 2011 94

Production Function, Returns to Scale, Economies & Diseconomies of scale, Fixed Cost, Variable Cost, Average

Costs, Cost Curves, Break Even point, Law of diminishing Marginal Utility

Costing of a product during the stages of its life cycle

9 Hours

Unit - IV

Pricing & Market Structure

Components of Pricing, Methods of Pricing, Return on Investment, Payback Period, Market Structure and Pricing,

Perfect Competition, Monopoly, Oligopoly, Monopolistic, Non price competition, E-commerce.

The secure payment process in e-commerce. 9 Hours

Unit - V

Introduction to Macro Economics & Financial Accounting

National Income – GDP, Per Capita Income, Inflation, Stagflation, Deflation, Business Cycle, Stabilization Policies,

Direct Taxes, Indirect Taxes, Balance of Payment. Accounting - Terminology, Book Keeping, P&L, Balance Sheet.

Role of Central Excise and Customs

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours Textbook (s)

1. A. Ramachandra Aryasri and V V Ramana Murthy, Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting, Tata

McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi, 2006

Reference (s)

1. V L Samuel Paul and G S Gupta, Managerial Economics – Concepts and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1981.

2. S N Maheswari, Financial and Management Accounting, Sultan Chand.

3. R Kesavan, C Elanchezhian and T Sunder Selwyn, Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting,

Laxmi Publication (P) Ltd , New Delhi, 2005.

98

11E702 ELECTRIC POWER GENERATION

3 0 0 3

Objectives

• To review and compare different types energy resources.

• To learn generation of electrical power from different types of power plants like thermal nuclear and hydro

power stations.

• To understand in detail the use of and production of electrical energy from solar energy, wind energy,

biomass Energy Ocean and tidal energy.

Program Outcomes



limitations.

PO7 : An ability to understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental



1. Acquire knowledge on Generation of electrical power by conventional and non – conventional methods.

2. Understand electrical energy conservation, energy auditing and power quality.

3. Apply the concept of load characteristics to choose capacity of power plants.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in power system.

Assessment Pattern

S. No.

†

Test I

†

Test II

Model

x m n i n†

Semester End

x m n i n

1 Remember 20 20 20 20



Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I Introduction

Prediction of Load

Definition of connected load, Maximum load, Maximum demand, Demand factor, Load factor, Diversity factor,

Plant capacity factor, Plant utilization factor, Load duration curve, Mass curve. Choice of Power station and units:

Types of power station, choice of type of generation, Choice of size of generator units and number of units.

Types of power station 9 Hours

Unit II

Steam Power station

Main parts and working of a steam station, Characteristics of steam turbines, Characteristics of turbo alternators, Steam station auxiliaries, Steam station layout, Super pressure steam stations.

Main parts of a steam station 9 Hours

Unit III

Hydro power station

Hydrology, hydrographs, Flow duration curve, Mass curve, Types of dam, Principle of working of a hydro electric

plant, Tidal power plant, Power to be developed,Types of turbine and their characteristics, Characteristics

of generators, Power station structure and layout.

Types of dam 9 Hours

Unit IV

Nuclear power stations

Main parts of nuclear power station principle of nuclear energy, Main parts of reactor, Types of power reactor,

location of nuclear power plant, Layout of power station, Reactor control, Nuclear waste disposal.

Types of power reactor 9 Hours

Unit V Alternative Sources of Energy

Solar radiation, Solar energy collectors, Conversion of solar energy into electric energy, Solar hydrogen energy

cycle, Wind mills, Tidal power generation schemes, Tidal barrage, Environmental aspects of new and old electric

energy generation. MHD generation: history of MHD generation, principle of MHD generation,

advantage of MHD generation.

Conversion of solar energy into electric energy 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook (s)

1. B.R. Gupta Generation of Electrical Energy, S.Chand Publishers, New Delhi,2008.

2. Car, T.H., Electric Power Station, Chappman & Hall Publishers, 2006.

Reference (s)

1. M.V. Deshpande ,Elements of Electric Power Station Design, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi ,2006

2. Soni Gupta Bhatnagar , A Course in Electrical Power, Dhanpat Rai Publishers, New Delhi ,2009

3. J.B.Gupta , A Course in Electrical Power, Kataria Publishers, New Delhi ,2007

100

11E703 VLSI DESIGN

3 0 0 3

Objectives

• To introduce the technology, design concepts and testing of Very Large Scale Integrated Circuits.

• This course will introduce the fundamental concepts and techniques involved in the fabrication of VLSI

(Very Large Scale Integration) circuits.

• Analyze various circuit design process

• Aims at providing a detailed view of programmable design flow using VHDL

Program outcomes



the limitations.



Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Analyze the various fabrication techniques using in VLSI applying basic concepts.

2. Design the subsystem with MOS and CMOS circuit design process

3. Investigate the VHDL programming applying basic concepts

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in embedded system.

Assesment pattern

S.

No.

†

Test I

†

Test II

Model

Examination†

Semester End

Examination

1 Remember 20 20 20 20


3 Apply 30 30 30 30


5 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I Overview of VLSI Design Technology

The VLSI design process – Architectural design – Logical design – physical design –Layout styles – Full custom –

Semi custom approaches. Basic electrical propertiesof MOS and CMOS circuits- Ids versus Vds relationships –

Transconductance – pass transistor – nMOS inverter – Determination of pull up to pull down ratio for an nMOS

inverter – CMOS inverter – MOS transistor circuit model.

9 Hours

CMOS inverter

Unit II

VLSI Fabrication Technology

Overview of wafer fabrication – Wafer processing – Oxidation – Patterning – Diffusion – Ion implantation– Deposition – Silicon gate nMOS process – nwell CMOS process– pwell CMOS process – Twintub process –Silicon on insulator

9 Hours

Twintub process

Unit III

MOS And CMOS Circuit Design Process

MOS layers – Stick diagrams – nMOS design style – CMOS design style – Design rules and layout –Lambda

based design rules – Contact cuts – Double metal MOS process rules – CMOS lambda based design rules – Sheet

resistance – Inverter delay – Driving large capacitive loads – Wiring capacitance.

Inverter delay 9 Hours

Unit IV

Subsystem Design

Switch logic – pass transistor and transmission gates – Gate logic – inverter – Two input NAND gate –NOR gate –

other forms of CMOS logic – Dynamic CMOS logic –Clocked CMOS logic – CMOS domain logic – Simple

combinational logic design examples – Parity generator – Multiplexers.

Multiplexers 9 Hours

Unit V VHDL Programming

RTL Design – Combinational logic – Types – Operators – Packages – Sequential circuit – Sub-programs –Test

benches. (Examples: adders, counters, flipflops, FSM, Multiplexers / Demultiplexers).

Design of four bit adders

102

Textbook (s)

1. Eshranghian E, Pucknell D A and Eshraghian S, “Essentials of VLSI circuits and systems”, PHI, NewDelhi,

2008,1st edition. Reference (s)

1. Charles H.Roth, “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Jaico Publishing House, 2006, 4th edition.

2. Weste N H, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design”, Pearson Education, India, 2003, 2nd edition .

3. Eugene D.Fabricius, “Introduction to VLSI Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd edition,1999

4. Bhasker, J. “A VHDL PRIMER” PHI, NewDelhi, 3rd,

edition.

5. Douglas Perry, “VHDL Programming by example”, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2007

6. http:// nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php? courseId=1004.

11E704 UTILISATION AND CONSERVATION OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY

3 0 0 3

Objective

• To impart knowledge on Generation of electrical power by conventional and non – conventional methods.

• To expose students to the main aspects of generation, utilization and conservation.

• Electrical energy conservation, energy auditing and power quality.

• Principle and design of illumination systems and methods of heating and welding.

• Electric traction systems and their performance.

• Industrial applications of electric drives.

Program outcomes



limitations




1. Design the wiring circuits and protection schemes for various types of electrical installations

2. Apply the electric drives and their power supply systems used in various types of electric traction applications.

3. Acquire software development skills and experience in the usage of standard packages necessary for analysis.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in power system operation and control.

Assessment pattern

S. No.

†

Test I

†

Test II

Model

Examination†

Semester End



3 Apply 30 30 30 30


5 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Illumination, Heating and Welding

Nature of radiation – definition – laws – Photometry – Lighting calculations – Design of illumination systems (for

residential, industrial, commercial, health care, street lightings, sports, administrative complexes) - Types of lamps -

energy efficiency lamps. Methods of heating, requirement of heating material – Design of heating element –Furnaces

– Welding generator – Welding transformer and its characteristics.

Characteristics of welding transformer 9 Hours

104

Unit II

Electric Traction

Introduction – requirements of an ideal traction system – Supply systems – Mechanics of train movement – Traction

motors and control – Multiple units – Braking – Current collection systems – Recent trends in electric traction.

Applications of braking

Unit III

Drives and Their Industrial Applications

9 Hours

Introduction – motor selection and related factors – Loads – Types – Characteristics – Steady state and

transient characteristics – Load equalization – Industrial applications – Modern methods of speed control of industrial

drives.

Application of speed control in industrial drives

Unit IV

Conservation

9 Hours

Economics of generation – definitions – load curves – number and size of units – cost of electrical energy – tariff –

need for electrical energy conservation – methods – energy efficient equipment – energy management – energy

auditing. Economics of power factor improvement – design for improvement of power factor using power capacitors

– power quality – effect on conservation.

Need for power factor improvement

9 Hours

Unit V

Demand Side Management

Introduction - Automated demand response - Peak saving - Load Leveling - Load control- Issues Involving the

Implementation Demand Side Management Solutions - Public Benefits Programs, Rate Schedules, Time-of-Use

Rates, Power Factor Charges, and Real - Time Pricing - Solar investment tax credit.

Need for demand side management

Text Books

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

1. E. Openshaw Taylor, Utilization of Electrical Energy in SI Units, Orient Longman Pvt.Ltd, 2003.

2. B.R. Gupta, Generation of Electrical Energy, Eurasia Publishing House (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.

References

1. H. Partab, Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2004.

2. Gopal.K.Dubey, Fundamentals of Electrical Drives, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.

3. C.L. Wadhwa, Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy, New Age International

Pvt.Ltd, 2003.

4. J.B. Gupta, Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction, S.K.Kataria and Sons, 2002.

106

11E707 POWER SYSTEM SIMULATION LABORATORY 0 0 3 1 .5

Objective

• To acquire software development skills and experience in the usage of standard packages necessary for

analysis.

• To knowledge about simulation of power system required for its planning, operation and control.

Program Outcomes


analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.

PO6: An ability to apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal

and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice

PO12: ability to recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life -long learning

in the broadest context of technological change.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Design any power system structure

2. Apply the recent advancement

3. Test stability analysis using energy function methods

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in power system analysis and “c” programming and Object oriented programming lab.

Assessment Pattern

Internal Semester End

Preparation Ass s1s0 e x m1n5 i n Observation and Results 10 20 Record 10 - Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 20 15

Total 50 50

List Of Experiments

1. Formation of Bus incidence matrix and loop incidence matrix

2. Formation of Branch path incidence matrix and Basic cutest matrix

3. Solution of Network equation

4. Study of Power House and Study of Indian Power Scenario

5. Power Flow Analysis - I: Solution of Power Flow and Related Problems Using Gauss-Seidel Method for IEEE 9 bus

system.

6. Power Flow Analysis II: Solution of Power Flow and Related Problems Using Newton-Raphson Method IEEE 13 bus system.

7. Power Flow Analysis II: Solution of Power Flow and Related Problems Using Fast-Decoupled Methods IEEE 9 bus

system.

8. Short Circuit Analysis Transient Stability Analysis of Multi machine Power Systems

9. Economic Dispatch in Power Systems

10. Mini Project

Practical Schedule

Total: 45 Hours


1

Formation of Bus incidence matrix

3

8

Power Flow Analysis II: Solution of

Power Flow and Related Problems

3

2

Formation of Bus loop incidence

matrix

9

Short Circuit Analysis Transient

Stability Analysis of Multi machine

3

3

Formation of Branch path incidence matrix

3

10

Short Circuit Analysis Transient

Stability Analysis of Multi machine

3

4 Formation of Basic cutest matrix

3

11 Economic Dispatch in Power

Systems

3

5 Solution of Network equation 3 Mini Project

6

Power Flow Analysis - I: Solution of


9

7 Power Flow Analysis II: Solution of


9

108

11E708 ELECTRIC DRIVES AND CONTROL LABORATORY

0 0 3 1

Objectives

• Able to identify the differences between synchronous motor drive and induction mot or drive and to learn

the basics of permanent magnet synchronous motor drives .

• To analyze and design the current and speed controllers for a closed loop solid state DC motor drive and

induction motor drive.

• After completions of all the experiments, the students will be able to perform the necessary tests to find out

the performance characteristics of the drives connected in any systems independently.

Program Outcomes




PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and rese arch methods including design of experiments,




the limitations.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Acquire knowledge on different types of power converters and its switching characteristics

2. Apply the converters concept and design the drives for various applications

3. Analyze the speed control methods for induction motor drive.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in power electronics lab.

Assessment Pattern

Internal Semester End

Preparation Ass s1s0 e x m1n5 i n Observation and Results 15 20 Record 10 - Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15

Total 50 50

List of Experiments

1. Four quadrant operation of DC motor drive

2. Speed control of slip ring induction motor by static rotor resistance.

3. VSI fed Induction motor drive.

4. CSI fed induction motor drive.

5. Speed control of motor drive.

6. DSP controller based speed control of Switched Reluctance Motor drive.

7. DSP controller based Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor drive.

8. Power quality analysis in different types of power converters fed electric drives.

9. Simulation of three phase converter fed DC motor drive

10. Design and simulation of chopper fed DC motor drive

11. Mini Project

Total: 45 Hours

Practical Schedule

Sl.

No.

Experiment Hours Sl.

No.

Experiment Hours

1

Four quadrant operation of DC motor drive

3

7

DSP controller based Permanent

Magnet Synchronous Motor drive

3

2

Speed control of slip ring induction motor by

static rotor resistance.

3

8

Power quality analysis in different

types of power converters fed

electric drives

3

3

VSI fed Induction motor drive.

3

9

Simulation of three phase

converter fed DC motor drive

7

4 CSI fed induction motor drive. 3 10 Design and simulation of chopper fed DC motor drive

7

5 Speed control of motor drive 3 Mini Project

6

DSP controller based speed control of Switched

Reluctance Motor drive.

3

110

11E709 Project Work Phase I

0 0 6 3

Programme Outcomes



PO9: An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in

multidisciplinary settings.

PO10: An ability to communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community

and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make

effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.

Course Outcomes

CO1:Identify and solve the engineering problems as per the need of industry and society

CO2: Simulate the real time models

CO3: Work in a team

CO4: Prepare the technical report and present

11O801 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS


2 0 0 2.0

Objective

• To study the basic issues in Professional Ethics.

• To appreciate the rights of others and to instill moral, social values and loyalty.

• To enable the student in their engineering profession who explore the ethical issues in technological

society.

Program Outcomes



PO8: An ability to apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of

the engineering practice.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Form opinions about various problems using ethical theories

2. Suggest possible solutions using reasoned ethical theories for engineering problems

3. Manage differing opinions on complex ethical scenario

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in social activity

Assessment Pattern

S. No.

†

†

Model

†

Semester End

1 Remember T 3s0 T 3s 0 x m3n0

i n x m3n0 i n 2 Understand 30 40 40 40 3 Apply 40 30 30 30 4 Analyze/Evaluate 0 - - - 5 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Human Values

Morals, Values and Ethics – Integrity – Work Ethic – Service Learning – Civic Virtue – Respect for Others – Living

Peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing Time – Co-operation – Commitment – Empathy –

Self-Confidence

Character – Spirituality in

business

6 Hours

112

Unit II

Engineering Ethics

Senses of 'Engineering Ethics' – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral autonomy – Kohlberg's theory –

Gilligan's theory – Consensus and controversy – Models of Professional Roles – Theories about right action

Self-interest – Uses of ethical theories

Unit III

Engineering as Social Experimentation

6 Hours

Engineering as experimentation – Engineers as responsible experimenters – Codes of ethics – A balanced outlook on

law – The Challenger case study – Bhopal Gas Tragedy – The Three Mile Island and Chernobyl case studies

Safety aspects in Nuclear Power plants

6 Hours

Unit IV

Responsibilities and Rights

Fundamental Rights, Responsibilities and Duties of Indian Citizens – Collegiality and loyalty – Respect for

authority – Collective bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of interest – Occupational crime – Professional rights – Employee rights – Discrimination

Right to Information Act 6Hours

Unit V

Global Issues

Multinational corporations – Environmental ethics and Environmental Protection Act – Computer ethics – Engineers

as managers – Consulting engineers – Engineers as expert witnesses and advisors – Moral leadership – Sample code

of ethics like IETE, ASME, ASCE, IEEE, Institution of Engineers (India), Indian Institute of Materials Management

Weapons development 6 Hours

Total: 30 Hours

Textbook (s)

1. M. Govindarajan, S. Natarajan and V. S. Senthil Kumar, Engineering Ethics, PHI Learning Private Ltd,

New Delhi, 2012.

References (s)

1. Charles D. Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall of India , New Jersey,

2004.

2. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company

Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.

3. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Protchard and Michael J. Rabins, Engineering Ethics – Concepts and

Cases, Wadsworth Thompson Learning, United States, 2005.

4. http://www.slideworld.org/slidestag.aspx/human-values-and- Professional-ethics

5. www.mne.psu.edu/lamancusa/ProdDiss/Misc/ethics.ppt

11E804 Project Work Phase II

0 0 24 12

Programme Outcomes



PO9: An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in

multidisciplinary settings.

PO10: An ability to communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering

community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design

documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.

Course Outcomes

CO1: Identify and solve the engineering problems as per the need of industry and society

CO2: Fabricate the Hardware model

CO3: Work in a team

CO4: Prepare the technical report and present

114

11O10B BASIC ENGLISH I

* 3 0 0 3.03

Objectives

• To offer students the basics of the English Language in a graded manner.

• To promote efficiency in English Language by offering extensive opportunities for the development of

four language skills (LSRW) within the classroom.

• An intense focus on improving and increasing vocabulary.

• To improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering students rigorous practice and exercises.

Programme Outcome PO1: An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or



with the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write

effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.

Course Outcomes


1. Converse in English with more confidence.

2. Improve and increase vocabulary

3. Improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering students rigorous practice and exercises.

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in school grammer

Unit I

Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets 1 Basic words- 12 most used words in

English, usage and pronunciation Starting a conversation and

talking about what one does Sentence construction

bolstered by Mother Tongue 2 Basic words- 20 oft used words,

usage and pronunciation Analyzing an action plan Creating and presenting ones

own action plan 3 Basic words with a focus on spelling Discriminative listening Informal conversation 4 Basic words- 10 oft used words,

usage and pronunciation Content listening and

Intonation Reading comprehension

5 Tutorial

Unit II

Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets 6 Basic words + greetings to be used at

different times of the day Formal conversation Intonation to be used in

formal address

7 Last 28 of the 100 most used words Informal conversation between equals

Reading practice and peer

8 Using the 14 target words to form bigger

words Informal dialogues using

contracted forms Guided speaking- talking to peers using

9 Palindromes, greetings- good luck,

festivals Placing a word within its

context- culling out meaning Offering

congratulations

10 Tutorial

Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets 11 Homophones Formal and informal methods

of self-introduction Let’s Talk is a group activity that gives them

some important pointers of speech

12 Homophone partners, matching words Contracted forms of the –be verbs, ‘ve and ‘s

Translating English sentences to Tamil with their meanings

13 Briefcase words- finding smaller words from a big word

Formal and informal ways of introducing others

Team work- speaking activity involving group work, soft skills

14 Compound words and pronunciation pointers

Giving personal details about oneself

Using the lexicon

15 Tutorial

Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets 16 Proper and common nouns Asking for personal

information and details Pronunciation pointers- an

informal introduction to

the IPA 17 Pronouns Telephone skills and etiquette Reading aloud and

comprehension 18 Abstract and common nouns Dealing with a wrong number Reading practice and

comprehension 19 Group names of animals, adjectives Taking and leaving messages

on the telephone Pronunciation pointers

20 Tutorial

Unit III

Unit IV

116

Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets 26 Words with silent ‘b’

Present continuous questions Calling for help in an

emergency Dialogue writing

27 Words with silent ‘c’

Simple present tense- form and usage Making requests and

responding to them politely Identifying elements of

grammar in text extract 28 Simple present tense- rules Describing people Guided writing 29 Words with silent ‘g’

Questions in the simple present tense Describing places Filling in the blanks with

correct markers of tense 30 Tutorial

Unit V

Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets 21 Determiners Interrupting a conversation

politely- formal and informal Pair work reading comprehension

22 Conjugation of the verb ‘to be’- positive and negative forms

Thanking and responding to thanks

Comprehension questions that test scanning,

skimming and deep

reading 23 Am/is/are questions Giving instructions and

seeking clarifications Small group activity that develops dialogue writing

24 Present continuous tense-form and usage Making inquiries on the telephone

Finishing sentences with appropriate verbs

25 Tutorial

Unit VI

Resources:

1. BASIC ENGLISH PROGRAMME L&L Education Resources , Chennai, 2011.

45 Hours

Objectives

11O10C COMMUNICATION ENGLISH *

• To equip students with effective speaking and listening skills in English

• To help the students develop speaking skills in Business English

3 0 0 3.0

Programme Outcomes

PO 9: An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or


PO 10 : An ability to communicate effectively on complex engineering activities



Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the students will be able to 1. Students will be able to develop the fluency and language competence of learners of Business

English at the lower intermediate level

2. Able to converse in English with more confidence.

3. Ability to improve and increase vocabulary

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge basic english

Unit I

Grammar and Vocabulary

Vocabulary for describing different organisational structures and company hierarchy – Practice using wh – questions; there is / there are, Definitions of Quality, Vocabulary of quality management – Using nouns and adjectives to form group nouns – Phrases for offering and accepting help and invitations – Telephone terms – Verb

tenses – Questions and responses – Conditionals – Gap Filling Exercises.

Unit II

Listening

9 Hours

Business Presentation – Conversation between old friends; introducing a stranger – Quality Manager talks about his work – Conversation between acquaintances – Sales talk at a sports equipment stand – Small talk among colleagues – Tour of a factory in Italy – Lunch in the factory canteen – Meeting to improve the efficiency of internal

communication – Telephone conversation arranging to meet – Credit card salesman talks to the bank – Conversation

between business acquaintances - Management meeting about a recent merger – Conversation about a town, a

country and its people.

Unit III

Speaking

9 Hours

Pronunciation Practice – Describing organizations - Company presentation –– Practicing of conversation starters and

closers with friends and strangers – Practice of simple language and step – by – step procedures to describe complex ideas – Explaining visual information – The language of increase and decrease applied to graphs and bar charts - Presenting a work – related graph – Making a telephone call – Sports equipment buyer and a manufacturer’s sales

representative talk business – Entertaining a visitor in your country – Short marketing meeting – Negotiating to meet

around a busy schedule – Pairs or small groups discuss the implications of problems at an electronics factory –

Finding out all you can about a partner – Chairing and holding meetings – Pairwork on questions and answers about

places and people.

Unit IV

Reading

9 Hours

118

Signalling the structure of a presentation – introducing, sequencing and concluding a presentation - Explaining

concepts and ideas – Pattern of phone call conversations – Giving, receiving and checking information – Common

Business phrases – Giving encouragement: phrases for positive feedback; more emphatic adjectives and adverbs –

Giving / providing facts and explaining functions and processes – Asking for and clarifying information – How to

state your point, agree and disagree – Practice of frequency, quantity and number - Short marketing meet –

Suggesting and agreeing times and places – Phrases for the Chairperson – People at work: their emotions, skills and

attitudes.

* Subject to continuous assessment

9 Hours

Unit V

Writing Present and future conditional Phrases for stalling for time - Common telephone phrases and responses - Business Communication – Calling for Quotation – (Letter asking for Clarification) – Transcoding – Rearranging the sentences – Cloze – Explaining Visual Information – Explaining concepts and ideas – Giving, getting and checking

information – Business description – Informal negotiations.

Textbook

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

1. Jeremy Comfort, Pamela Rogerson, Trish Stott, and Derek Utley, Speaking Effectively – Developing Speaking Skills for Business English, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 2002

References

1. Brook-Hart Guy, BEC VANTAGE: BUSINESS BENCHMARK Upper-Intermediate – Student’s Book, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2006

2. Aruna Koneru, Professional Communication, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008

3. P. Kiranmai Dutt, Geetha Rajeevan and CLN Prakash, A Course in Communication Skills, Cambridge

University Press, New Delhi, 2008

4. Krishna Mohan Balaji, Advanced Communicative English, Tata Mc- graw-hill Education Private Limited,

New Delhi, 2009.

Module

Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets

31

Difference between present

continuous and simple present tense.

Calling for help in an

emergency Reporting an event-

journalistic style

32

Verbs ‘have’ and ‘have got’ Describing animals Asking for and giving

directions

33 Simple past tense Inviting people,

accepting and declining

invitations

Self- enquiry and offering ones opinion on a given topic.

34

Spelling rules & table of irregular verbs

Refusing an invitation Reading and practicing pre- written dialogues

35

Tutorial

Module


11O20B BASIC ENGLISH II *

Objectives

3 1 0 3.5

To give room for a tacit acquisition of Basic English Grammar through ample listening, reading and writing inputs with

direct theory wherever relevant

• To specifically focus on speaking and conversation skills with an aim to increase speaking confidence

• To nurture in students the capacity to express themselves lucidly and articulate their thoughts and impressions on a

wide gamut of topics both through speech and writing

• To improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering rigorous practice and exercises

• To correct common mistakes and to teach self-assessment techniques

Programme Outcomes






Course Outcomes

On successful completion of this course, The students will be able to

1. Communicate better with improved fluency, vocabulary and pronunciation.

2. Promote fluency even downplaying accuracy

3. Improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering rigorous practice and exercises

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in Basic English I

Unit I

Unit II

120

Module


41

Simple future tense Talking about the

weather Making plans- applying

grammar theory to written

work 42 Simple future tense- more aspects,

possessive pronouns Talking about possessions

Opening up and expressing one’s emotions

43 Future continuous Talking about current activities

Listening comprehension

44 Revision of future tense- simple and continuous forms, prepositions used with time and

date

Asking for the time and date

Discussion- analyzing and debating a given topic.

45 Tutorial

Module


46 Articles a/an Writing, speaking and presentation skills

Transcribing dictation

47 Singular- Plural (usage of a/an) Reading practice- independent and shared reading

Comprehension –logical analysis, process analysis and subjective expression

48 Countable and uncountable

nouns- a/an and some Listening

comprehension Vocabulary: using context

tools to decipher meaning 49 Articles- the Sequencing sentences in

a paragraph Listening to a poem being recited, answer questions on it and practice reciting the same

50 Tutorial

Module


51 Articles- the: usage and avoidance Speaking: sharing stories about family,

village/town, childhood etc. 10 students

Listening: comprehend and follow multiple step

instructions read out by the teacher

52 Articles- the: usage and avoidance with like and hate

Speaking: sharing

stories about family,

village/town, childhood

etc.- 10 students

Reading: make inferences

from the story about the plot, setting and characters

36

Questions and the negative forms

of the simple past tense Apologizing and responding to an

apology

(Reading) conversation

practice

37 Asking questions in the simple past tense

Reading comprehension Seeking, granting and refusing permission.

38

Past continuous tense Paying compliments and responding to them

Pair work: writing dialogues and presenting them

39

Difference between simple past

and past continuous- when and

where to use each

Describing daily routines

Reading and comprehension skills.

40 Tutorial

Unit III

Unit IV

Unit V

Module


56 One and ones Collaborative learning-

problem solving Writing short answers to

questions based on reading 57 Capitalization and punctuation Controlled writing Listen to a story and respond

to its main elements 58 Syntax and sentence construction-

rearrange jumbled sentences Guided writing Listen to a poem and discuss

its elements 59 Cloze Free writing Frame simple yet purposeful

questions about a given passage

60 Tutorial

53 Articles- the: usage and avoidance with names of places

Speaking: sharing stories about family, village/town, childhood

etc.- 10 students

Comprehension passage

54 This/ that/ these and those Writing a notice- announcement

Speaking: Debate

55 Tutorial

Unit VI

Resources: 45+15 Hours

1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.

11O20C ADVANCED COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH*

3 1 0 3.5

Objectives

• To take part in a discussion in an effective manner

• To listen to an explanation and respond

• To write a formal communication

Programme Outcomes PO 9: An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or





Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Clear the BEC Vantage Level Examination conducted by the Cambridge ESOL

2. Read company literature or any document

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in basic English II

Unit I

Grammar and Vocabulary Comparison of adjectives and adverbs – tenses – simple and complex questions – countable/ uncountable nouns, - ing forms and infinitives – conditionals – comparing and contrasting ideas – modal verbs – while and whereas for contrasting ideas – passives – used to, articles, reported speech, relative pronouns and expressing cause and result – workplace-related vocabulary.

122

Unit II

Listening

9 Hours

Prediction - Ability to identify information – Ability to spell and write numbers correctly – Ability to infer, understand gist, topic, context, and function, and recognize communicative functions ( complaining, greeting,

apologizing etc.) – Ability to follow a longer listening task and interpret what the speakers say.

Unit III

Speaking

9 Hours

Ability to talk about oneself and perform functions such as agreeing and disagreeing – Ability to express opinions, agree, disagree, compare and contrast ideas and reach a decision in a discussion – appropriate use of stress, rhythm,

intonation and clear individual speech sounds - take an active part in the development of the discourse - turn-taking and sustain the interaction by initiating and responding appropriately

Unit IV

Reading

9 Hours

Ability to skim and scan business articles for specific details and information – To understand the meaning and the structure of the text at word, phrase, sentence, and paragraph level – Ability to read in detail and interpret opinions

and ideas – to develop one’s understanding and knowledge of collocations – Ability to identify and correct errors in texts

9 Hours

Unit V Writing Ability to write concisely, communicate the correct content and write using the correct register – Ability to write

requests, instructions, explanations, and ask for information by using the correct format in business correspondences

like charts, memo, note, email, letter, fax, report, proposal – understanding formal and informal styles – responding to written or graphic input

Text Book

9 Hours

Total: 45+15 Hours

1. Brook-Hart, Guy, Business Benchmark: Upper Intermediate – Student’s Book, Cambridge University

Press, New Delhi, 2006

References

1. Whitby, Norman, Bulats Edition: Business Benchmark, Pre-Intermediate to Intermediate – Student’s Book,

Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2006 2. Cambridge Examinations Publishing, Cambridge BEC Vantage – Self-study Edition, Cambridge University

Press, UK, 2005

Objectives

11O20G GERMAN *

3 0 1 3.5

• To help students acquire the basics of German language

• To teach them how to converse in German in various occasions






Course Outcomes


1. Become familiar with the basics of German language and start conversing in German.

2. Acquire the basics of German language

Unit I

Grammar & Vocabulary Introduction to German language: Alphabets, Numbers – Nouns - Pronouns Verbs and Conjugations - definite and indefinite article - Negation - Working with Dictionary – Nominative - Accusative and dative case – propositions -

adjectives - modal auxiliaries - Imperative case - Possessive articles.

Unit II

Listening

9 Hours

Listening to CD supplied with the books, paying special attention to pronunciation: Includes all lessons in the book – Greetings - talking about name – country – studies – nationalities - ordering in restaurants - travel office -

Interaction with correction of pronunciation. 9 Hours

Unit III

Speaking Speaking about oneself - about family – studies - questions and answers - dialogue and group conversation on topics

in textbooks - talks on chosen topics.

9 Hours

Unit IV

Reading

Reading lessons and exercises in the class - pronunciation exercises: Alphabet – name – country – people –

profession – family – shopping – travel – numbers – friends – restaurant – studies - festivals

9 Hours

Unit V

Writing Alphabets – numbers - words and sentences - Exercises in the books - control exercises - writing on chosen topics

such as one self – family – studies - country.

9 Hours Total: 45+15 Hours

124

Textbooks

1. Grundkurs DEUTSCH A Short Modern German Grammar Workbook and Glossary,

VERLAG FUR DEUTSCH, Munichen, 2007.

2. Grundkurs, DEUTSCH Lehrbuch Hueber Munichen, 2007.

References

1. Cassel Language Guides – German: Christine Eckhard – Black & Ruth Whittle, Continuum, London / New

York, 1992. 2. Kursbuch and Arbeitsbuch, TANGRAM AKTUELL 1 DEUTSCH ALS FREMDSPRACHE,

NIVEAUSTUFE AI/1, Deutschland, Goyal Publishers & Distributers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.

3. Langenscheidt Eurodictionary – German – English / English – German, Goyal Publishers & Distributers

Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

11O20H HINDI *

Objectives

• To help students acquire the basics of Hindi

• To teach them how to converse in Hindi in various occasions

• To help learners acquire the ability to understand a simple technical text in Hindi



3 1 0 3.5




Course Outcomes


1. Become familiar with the basics of Hindi language and start conversing in Hindi.

2. Converse in Hindi in various occasions

Unit I

Hindi Alphabet Introduction - Vowels - Consonants - Plosives - Fricatives - Nasal sounds - Vowel Signs - Chandra Bindu & Visarg

-Table of Alphabet -Vocabulary. Unit II

Nouns

Genders (Masculine & Feminine Nouns ending in – ā,і,ī, u,ū )- Masculine & Feminine – Reading Exercises.

Unit III

Pronouns and Tenses

9 Hours

9 Hours

Categories of Pronouns - Personal Pronouns - Second person (you & honorific) - Definite & Indefinite pronouns - Relative pronouns - Present tense - Past tense - Future tense - Assertive & Negative Sentences - Interrogative

Sentences.

Unit IV

Classified Vocabulary

9 Hours

Parts of body – Relatives – Spices – Eatables – Fruits & Vegetables - Clothes - Directions – Seasons - Professions.

Unit V

Speaking Model Sentences – Speaking practice for various occasions.

Textbook

9 Hours

9 Hours

Total: 45+15 Hours

1. B. R. Kishore, Self Hindi Teacher for Non-Hindi Speaking People, Vee Kumar Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

References

1. Syed, Prayojan Mulak Hindi, Rahamathullah Vani Prakasan, New Delhi, 2002.

2. Ramdev, Vyakaran Pradeep, Saraswathi Prakasan, Varanasi, 2004.

11O20J JAPANESE *

Course Objectives(COs)

• To help students acquire the basics of Japanese language

• To teach them how to converse in Japanese in various occasions

• To teach the students the Japanese cultural facets and social etiquettes



3 1 0 3.5




Course Outcomes


1. Become familiar with the basics of Japanese language and start conversing in Japanese.

2. Converse in Japanese in various occasions

Unit I

Introduction to Japanese - Japanese script - Pronunciation of Japanese(Hiragana) - Long vowels - Pronunciation of in,tsu,ga - Letters combined with ya,yu,yo - Daily Greetings and Expressions - Numerals. N1 wa N2 des - N1 wa N2 ja arimasen - S ka - N1mo - N1 no N2 - …….san - Kanji - Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)

Phonetic and semantic resemblances between Tamil and Japanese

Unit II

9 Hours

Introduction - Kore - Sore - are - Kono N1 - Sono N1 - ano N1 - so des - so ja arimasen - S1 ka - S2 ka - N1 no N1 - so des ka – koko - soko - asoko - kochira - sochira - achira - N1 wa N2 (Place) des – dhoko-N1 no N2 - Kanji-10 -

ima….ji…fun des - Introduction of verb - V mas - V masen - V mashitha - V masen deshitha - N1(Time) ne V - N1

kara N2 des - N1 tho N2 / S ne Kanji-10 - Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers) – Dictionary Usage.

9 Hours Unit III

- N1(Place) ye ikimas - ki mas - kayerimasu - Dhoko ye mo ikimasen - ikimasendheshitha - N1(vehicle) de ikimasu - kimasu - kayerimasu - N1(Personal or Animal) tho V ithsu - S yo. - N1 wo V (Transitive) - N1 wo shimus - Nani

wo shimasu ka - Nan & Nani - N1(Place) de V - V masen ka - V masho - Oo……. Kanji-10 , N1( tool - means ) de

V - “ Word / Sentence ” wa …go nan des ka - N1( Person ) ne agemus - N1( Person ) ne moraimus - mo V

shimashitha - , Kanji-10 – Japanese Typewriting using JWPCE Software, Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25

Numbers)

Unit IV 9 Hours

Introduction to Adjectives - N1 wa na adj des. N1 wa ii adj des - na adj na N1 - ii adj ii N1 - Thothemo - amari - N1

wa dho des ka - N1 wa dhonna N2 des ka - S1 ka S2 – dhore - N1 ga arimasu - wakarimasu - N1 ga suki masu - N1

ga kiraimasu - jozu des - hetha des - dhonna N1 - Usages of yoku - dhaithai - thakusan - sukoshi - amari - zenzen -

S1 kara S2 - dhoshithe, N1 ga arimasu - imasu - N1(Place) ne N2 ga arimasu - iimasu - N1 wa N2(Place) ne arimasu

126

- iimasu - N1(Person,Place,or Thing ) no N2 (Position) - N1 ya N2, Kanji-10 - Japanese Dictionary usage using

JWPCE Software, Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)

Unit V 9 Hours

Saying Numbers , Counter Suffixes , Usages of Quantifiers -Interrogatives - Dhono kurai - gurai –Quantifier-(Period

) ne ….kai V - Quantifier dhake / N1 dhake Kanji - Past tense of Noun sentences and na Adjective sentences - Past tense of ii-adj sentences - N1 wa N2 yori adj des - N1 tho N2 tho Dhochira ga adj des ka and its answering method -

N1 [ no naka ] de nani/dhoko/dhare/ithsu ga ichiban adj des ka - answering -N1 ga hoshi des - V1 mas form dhake

mas - N1 (Place ) ye V masu form ne iki masu/ki masu/kayeri masu - N1 ne V/N1 wo V - Dhoko ka - Nani ka –

gojumo - Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)

9Hours

Total: 45+15 Hours

Textbooks

1. Japanese for Everyone: Elementary Main Textbook 1-1, Goyal Publishers and Distributors Pvt. Ltd., Delhi, 2007.

2. Japanese for Everyone: Elementary Main Textbook 1-2, Goyal Publishers and Distributors Pvt. Ltd.,

Delhi, 2007.

References

Software 1. Nihongo Shogo-1 2. Nihongo Shogo-2

3. JWPCE Software

Websites

1. www.japaneselifestyle.com 2. www.learn-japanese.info/ 3. www.kanjisite.com/

4. www.learn-hiragana-katakana.com/typing-hiragana-characters/

128

Objectives 11O20F FRENCH

*

• To help students acquire the basics of French language

• To teach them how to converse in French in various occasions

Programme Outcomes



3 1 0 3.5




Course Outcomes


1. Listen, Read, Write and Speak French language

2. Ability to converse in French in various occasions

Unit I Alphabet Français (alphabets) - Les accents français (the accents in French) – aigu – grave – circonflexe – tréma -

cédille - écrire son nom dans le français (spelling one’s name in French)

Unit II

9 Hours

Les noms de jours de la semaine (Days of the week) - Les noms de mois de l'année (Months) - numéro 1 à 100

(numbers 1 to 100)

Unit III

9 Hours

Moyens de transport (transport) - noms de professions (professions) - noms d'endroits communs (places) -

nationalités (nationalities)

Unit IV

9 Hours

Pronoms (pronouns) - Noms communs masculins et de femme (common masculine and feminine nouns) - Verbes

communs (common verbs)

9 Hours Unit V

Présentation - même (Introducing Oneself) - narration de son nom - l'endroit où on vit - son âge - date de naissance - sa profession - numéro de téléphone - adresse (name - where one lives – age - date of birth – profession - telephone

number and address) - Narration du temps (tellling the time)

9 Hours

Total: 45+15 Hours

Textbook 1. Angela Wilkes, French for Beginners, Usborne Language Guides, Usborne Publishing Ltd., Ohio, 1987.

References 1. Ann Topping, Beginners French Reader, Natl Textbook Co, 1975. 2. Stanley Applebaum, First French Reader, Dover Publications, 1998.

3. Max Bellancourt, Cours de Français, London: Linguaphone, 2000.

Software 1. Français Linguaphone, Linguaphone Institute Ltd., London, 2000. 2. Français I. Harrisonburg: The Rosetta Stone: Fairfield Language Technologies, 2001.

11E001 ADVANCED POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES

Objectives

• To learn the characteristics of different types of semiconductor devices.

• To learn the applications of semiconductor devices.

• To study the need for isolation circuits

. Program Outcomes

3 0 0 3.0


design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public

health and safety, cultural, societal and environmental considerations.

PO5: An ability to create, select, and apply appropriate techniques,

resources, and modern engineering tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with

an understanding of the limitations.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Understand various advanced power electronic devices

2. Analyze the power handling capability of various advanced power electronic devices

3. Apply the knowledge of semiconductor devices for various applications

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on Electron devices & Power electronics.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model

Examination†

Semester End

Examination


Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction Power switching devices overview – Attributes of an ideal switch, application requirements, circuit symbols – Power handling capability – (SOA); Device selection strategy – On-state and switching losses – EMI due to switching – Power diodes – Types, forward and reverse characteristics, switching characteristics – Rating.

EMI due to switching 9 Hours

Unit II

Power Transistor BJTs – Construction, static characteristics, switching characteristics- Negative temperature coefficient and

secondary breakdown – Power Darlington - Thermal protection.

Importance of power darlington

Unit III

Thyristor

9 Hours

Thyristors – Physical and electrical principle underlying operating mode – Two transistor analogy– concept of

latching – Gate and switching characteristics –Converter grade and inverter grade and other types; series and parallel operation – Comparison of BJT and Thyristor – Steady state and dynamic models of BJT and Thyristor - thermal

protection - Mounting types.

130

Two transistor analogy

Unit IV

Voltage Controlled Devices

9 Hours

Power MOSFETs and IGBTs – Principle of voltage controlled devices, construction, types, static and switching characteristics – Steady state and dynamic models of MOSFET and IGBTs; Basics of GTO, MCT, FCT, RCT and

IGCT.

Comparison of components 9 Hours

Unit V

Firing and Protecting Circuits Necessity of isolation – Pulse transformer – Opto-coupler; Gate drive circuit for SCR,MOSFET, IGBTs and base

driving for power BJT – Overvoltage, over current and gate protections, Design of snubbers.

Need for protection

Textbook 1. Timothy L.Skvarenina, The power electronics handbook, CRC press, New Delhi, 2008

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

References

1. M. H. Rashid, Power Electronics circuits, Devices and Applications, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009. 2. Baliga, B. Jayant, Fundamentals of Power Semiconductor Devicesspringer, 2008.

3. Bimal K. Bose, Modern Power electronics

4. and AC drives, Pearson Education, Asia Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.

5. M. D. Singh and K. B. Khanchandani, Power Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill book Co,New Delhi, 2003.

6. Ned Mohan, Undeland and Robins, Power Electronics – Concepts, applications and design, John Wiley and

sons, Singapore, 2000.

11E002 MICROCONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To understand the need of Micro-Controller family

• To develop the assembly level programs based on Intel 8031, 8096 & PIC micro-controllers

• To design the detailed hardware circuits for the given applications

• To identify the need for I/O and memory expansion methods for an application

Program Outcomes



PO5: An ability to create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering tools


limitations.

Course Outcomes


1. Understand the architecture of Microcontrollers 2. Develop the interfacing and Programming skills. 3. Understand the Design of P I C Microcontrollers

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on Microprocessor.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†


Semester End

Examination


Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

8051 Microcontroller

Role of microcontrollers - 8 bit microcontrollers - architecture of In 8031/8051/8751 -hardware description - memory organization - addressing mode - Boolean processing - instruction set - simple programs.

Need for memory organization in 8051 9 Hours

Unit II

Interfacing & Applications

Peripheral interface - interrupt - applications - small motor control - keyboard interfacing - pulse width and frequency interfacing - analog and digital interfacing.

Necessity of ADC conversion 9 Hours

Unit III

8096 Microcontroller Programming Framework

16bit microcontroller - Intel 8096 - architecture - modes of operation - addressing modes - Instruction set - simple

programs. 8096 Memory Structure, Power down Mode of CPU 9 Hours

Unit IV

Real Time Control Peripheral functions of Intel 8096 - Interrupt structure - Timer - High speed inputs and outputs analog interface- PWM output I/O ports- status and control registers - watch dog timer- bus timing and memory interface - need for expansion methods.

Necessity of WDT, PWM Mode 9 Hours

Unit V

PIC Microcontroller

Introduction - PIC microcontroller- Architecture-memory organization - I/O ports - Reset circuits - Instruction set - compare/capture/PWM- Application and introduction to MPLAB.

USART,I2C,ADC 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook 1. Ajay V.Deshmukh, Microcontrollers: Theory and ApplicationsTata McGraw Hill, 2004.

References 1. John Peatman, Design with Microcontrollers, McGraw Hill Book company, Singapore, 1988 2. John Peatman, Design with PIC Microcontrollers, Pearson Education Asia, 2001

3. Intel, 16Bit Embedded Controller Hand Book, Intel Corporation USA, 1989

132

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II† Model



Total 100 100 100 100

Objectives

11E003 SWITCHED MODE POWER CONVERTER 3 0 0 3.0

• To understand the analyze the basic topologies of switched mode converters

• To understand the different types of modulation schemes and control techniques of the converters

• To estimate the switching and conduction losses taking place in switched mode converters.

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Understand the converter topologies and Modulation techniques.

2. Analyze the Current control schemes and closed loop control techniques.

3. Understand the Power Factor Control techniques.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on power electronics..

Assessment Pattern

Unit-1

Converter Topologies Buck, Boost, Buck – Boost SMPS Topologies. Basic Operation – Waveforms – modes of operation – switching stresses – switching and conduction losses – optimum switching frequency – practical voltage, current and power limits – design relations – voltage mode

control principles- Data sheets.

Design relations 9 Hours

Unit-II

Carrier Modulation

Switch-Mode dc-ac Inverters - Basic Concepts - Single Phase Inverters - Push Pull - Half Bridge and Full Bridge Square Inverters - Blanking Time - Single Pulse Modulation of Single Phase Square Wave Inverters - Multi pulse modulation - PWM Principles -

Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation in Single Phase Inverters - Choice of carrier frequency in SPWM - Bipolar and Unipolar

Switching in SPWM.

Unipolar switching in SPWM 9 Hours

Unit-III

Current Control Schemes Current Regulated Inverter - Current Regulated PWM Voltage Source Inverters - Methods of Current Control - Hysteresis Control - Variable Band Hysteresis Control - Fixed Switching Frequency Current Control Methods - Switching Frequency Vs accuracy of

Current Regulation - Areas of application of Current Regulated VSI

Methods of current control

Unit-IV

Closed Loop Control

9 Hours

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model



Switched Mode Rectifier - Operation of Single/Three Phase Bridges in Rectifier Mode - Control Principles - Control of the DC Side

Voltage - Voltage Control Loop - The inner Current Control Loop.

Inner current control loop

Unit-V

Power Factor Control

9 Hours

Shunt Reactive Power Compensators - Switched Capacitors - Static Reactor Compensators based on thyristor - Static Reactive VAR

Generators using PWM Current Regulated VSIs - Principles - Control Strategies - Series Compensation by PWM-VSI based Voltage

Injection Scheme - Principles - Control Strategies.

Classification of Resonant Converter 9Hours

Total :45 Hours

Textbooks

1. Apraham I Pressman, Switching Power Supply Design, McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 2008. 2. Daniel M Mitchell, DC – DC Switching Regulator Analysis, Mc Graw Hill publishing Company, 2005.

3. Ned Mohan, Power Electronics, John Wiley and Sons, 2006

References

1. Otmar Kilgenstein, Switched Mode Powe Supplies in practice, John Wiley and Sons, 2002. 2. Keith H Billings, Handbook of Switched Moder Power Supplies, McGraw Hill Publishing Conpany, 2000.

3. Mark J Nave, Power Line Filter Design for Switched – Mode Power Supplies, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 2004.

11E004 POWER ELECTRONIC INTERFACES FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES

OF POWER GENERATION

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To understand about the non renewable energy sources and need for it.

• To study about the various wind energy and solar power conversion methodologies.

• To know about generation and storing technologies for renewable energy sources.

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. D emonstrate the energy sources and their availability

2. Understand SECS and WECS.

3. Analyze the Grid connected and Stand alone systems..

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on power electronics & machines.

Assessment Pattern

134


Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction Trends in energy consumption – World and Indian energy scenario – Energy sources and their availability, Economics and Efficiency – Energy consumption pattern and growth rate in India – Need to develop new energy technologies.

Need to develop new energy technologies. 9 Hours

Unit II

Solar Energy Conversion Systems

Solar radiation and measurements- solar cells – Panels and their characteristics – Influence of insulation and temperature – PV arrays – Electrical storage with batteries – Solar availability in India – Switching devices for solar energy conversion – Maximum power

point tracking – DC power conditioning converters – maximum power point tracking algorithms – AC power conditioners – Line

commutated inverters- Synchronized operation with grid supply- Harmonic problem – Applications – Water pumping – Street

lighting – Analysis of PV systems.

Water pumping,Street lighting 9 Hours

Unit III

Wind Energy Conversion Systems

Basic principle of wind energy conversion – Nature of wind – Power and energy from the wind - Components of wind turbine generator (WTG) – Types of WTG – Squirrel cage and double output induction generators – Field excited and permanent magnet

synchronous generators - Fixed and variable speed drives – System performance.

Fixed and variable speed drives – System performance. 9 Hours

Unit IV Grid Connected Wind Energy Conversion Systems

Grid connectors – Wind farm and its accessories – Grid related problems – Generator control – Performance improvements – Different schemes – AC voltage controllers – Harmonics and power factor improvement.

Grid related problems 9 Hours

Unit V

Stand-Alone Power Supply Systems Self excited induction generator for isolated wind power generation – Theory of self excitation – Capacitance requirements – Power conditioning schemes – Controllable DC power from SEIGs - Solar – PV – Hybrid systems – Selection of power conversion ratio –

Optimization of system components – Storage.

Storage. 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. S. Rao. and Parulekar, Energy Technology – Non Conventional, Renewable and Conventional, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1999.

References

1. R. Mukund R. Patel, Wind and Solar Power Systems, CRC Press LLC, New York, 1999. 2. G.D.Rai, Non Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1993.

3. H.P. Garg and J. Prakash., Solar Energy – Fundamentals & Applications, Tata McGraw Hill book Co, New Delhi, 1997.

4. S.P. Sukhatme S.P., Solar Energy; (Principles of thermal collection and storage), Tata McGraw

Hill book Co, New Delhi, 1998.

Objectives

11E005 POWER ELECTRONICS APPLICATIONS TO POWER SYSTEM 3 0 0 3.0

• To impart knowledge on different types of converter configurations.

• To study the different Applications of converters in HVDC systems

• To design and analyze the different types of protection schemes for converters.

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course Outcomes


1. D emonstrate the single phase and three phase power converters 2. Understand the power flow analysis.

3. Analyze the protection systems and static applications

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on power systems & converters.

Assessment Pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model


1 Remember 10 10 10 10 2 Understand 20 20 20 20


Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction High Power drives for Power systems controllers – Characteristics – Converters Configuration for Large power control.

Converters Configuration for Large power control. 9 Hours

Unit II

Single Phase and Three Phase Converters

Properties – Current and voltage harmonics – Effect of source and load impendence – Choice of best circuit for power systems- Converter Control - Gate Control – Basic means of Control – Control characteristics – Stability of control – Reactive power control -

Applications of converters in HVDC systems – Static VAR control - Source of reactive power – Harmonics and filters.

Static VAR control, Source of reactive power 9 Hours

Unit III

Power Flow Analysis Components models – Converter model – Analysis of converters - Load flow analysis – Transient and dynamic stability – Protection

Analysis of converters,Load flow analysis 9 Hours

Unit IV

136

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II† Model


Examination 1 Remember 10 10 10 10 2 Understand 20 20 20 20 3 Apply 30 30 30 30 4 Analyze / Evaluate 30 30 30 30

Protection

Basic of Protection – DC reactors – Voltage and current oscillations – Clearing line faults and re-energizing – Circuit breakers – Over voltage protection - Corona – Critical corona voltage- Voltage stress - Corona discharge - Losses – Radio interference.

Circuit breakers, Over voltage protection, Corona, Critical corona voltage 9 Hours

Unit V

Static Applications

Static excitation of synchronous generators - Solid state tap changers for transformer - UPS Systems - Induction furnace control.

Solid state tap changers for transformer - UPS Systems 9 Hours Total: 45Hours

References 1. K.R. Padiyar, HVDC Power Transmission System – Technology and System Interaction, New Delhi, New Age International,

2002.

2. P.Kundur “POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND CONTROL” Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited.

3. E.W. Kimbark, Direct Current Transmission, Vol.1, New York, Wiley Interscience, 1971.

4. Ned Mohan, Power Electronics Converters Applications and Design, New York, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.

11E006 COMPUTER AIDED ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF SYSTEMS

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• The course has been designed to provide a solid foundation to the students in the following areas systems modeling,

simulation and analysis

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Acquire knowledge on CAD systems

2. Apply various design processing of electrical machines

3. Validate various design processing of electrical machines

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on machines and MATLAB.

Assessment Pattern

5 Create 10 10 10 10

Total 100 100 100 100

138

Unit I

Introduction Conventional design procedures – Limitations – Need for field analysis based design. Problem definition-solving methods 9 Hours

Unit II

Mathematical Formulation of Field Problems

Electromagnetic Field Equations – Magnetic Vector/Scalar potential – Electrical vector /Scalar potential – Stored energy in field

problems – Inductance - Development of torque/force- Laplace and Poisson’s Equations – Energy functional - Principle of

energy conversion.

Numerical methods for formulation of field problems 9 Hours

Unit III CAD Packages

Elements of a CAD System – Pre-processing – Modelling – Meshing – Material properties- Boundary Conditions – Setting up solution – Post processing.

CAD modeling of capacitor, inductor and current carrying conductor 9 Hours

Unit IV

Design Applications

Computer Aided design of Induction Motor: Squirrel cage motors – Slip ring motors - Dc Motor: series and shunt motors –

Synchronous motors: cylindrical and wound rotors types – Insulators – Power transformer – CTs – PTs.

Design of energy efficient machines

Unit V

System Design and Analysis Using MatLab

9Hours

Component of systems – Continuous and discrete systems – Models of systems-modeling approach, steady state and transient

analysis of systems subjected to different environment conditions.

State space model and analysis of electrical systems

Textbook

9Hours

Total: 45 Hours

1. M. Ramamoorthy, Computer Aided Design of Electrical Equipment, Affiliated East-west PressPvt Ltd, New Delhi 2007

References

1. S. R. H Hoole, Computer Aided, Analysis and Design of Electromagnetic Devices, El Sevier Publishing Co, New York, 2010

2. D. A. Lowther and P. P. Silvester, Computer Aided Design in Magnetics, Springer verlag

Publishing Co, New York, 2008

3 . K. Ogatta, Modern control Engineering, Perason education 2007.

Dorf and Bishop, Modern Control Engineering, Addison Weseley, 2005.

4. K. Sawhny, A course in Electrical Machine Design, Khanna Puplications, New Delhi 2007

Objectives

11E007 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3.0

• To understand the need for FACTS

• To learn shunt and series compensation techniques

• To learn about controlled voltage and face angle regulator

• To learn the concept of unified power flow controller

Program Outcomes





limitations.


solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable

development.

Course outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Demonstrate their FACTs and Static Var Compensation

2. Understand Series Compensation

3. Understand Static phase angle regulator and Emerging FACTs controller

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on power system. Assessment Pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model




Total 100 100 100 100

Unit – I

Introduction to FACTS

Electrical Transmission Network - Necessity - Power Flow in AC System - relative importance of controllable parameter - opportunities for FACTS - possible benefits for FACTS.

Possible benefits for FACTS 9 Hours

Unit – II

Static Var Compensation Need for compensation - introduction to shunt & series compensation - objectives of shunt & series compensation - configuration & operating characteristics - Thyristor Controlled Reactor (TCR) - Thyristor Switched Capacitor (TSC) -

Comparison of TCR & TSC.

Comparison of TCR & TSC 9 Hours

140

Unit – III

Series Compensation Variable Impedance Type Series Compensation: Thyristor Switched Series Capacitor (TSSC) - Thyristor Controlled Series Capacitor (TCSC) - Basic operating control schemes for TSSC & TCSC.

Basic operating control schemes for TSSC & TCSC 9 Hours

Unit – IV

Static Voltage Phase Angle Regulator

Objectives of voltage & phase angle regulators - approaches to Thyristor - Controlled Voltage & Phase Angle Regulator.

Controlled Voltage & Phase Angle Regulator 9 Hours

Unit – V

Emerging Facts Controller

STATCOM - Introduction to Unified Power Flow Controller (UPFC) & Interline Power Flow Controller (IPFC) - basic operating principles UPFC - introduction to sub synchronous resonance.

Basic operating principles UPFC 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Text Book

1. R. Mohan Mathur and Rajiv K.Varma, Thyristor Based FACTS Controller for Electrical Transmission Systems, Wiley Interscience Publications, 2002.

References

1. Narain G. Hingorani & Laszlo Gyugyi, Understanding FACTS - Concepts & Technology of Flexible AC Transmission Systems, Standard Publishers, New Delhi, 2001.

2. T. J. E. Miller, Reactive Power Control in Electric System, John Wiley & Sons, 1997.

3. G. K. Dubey, Thyristerized Power Controller, New Age international (P) Ltd., New Delhi 2001.

4. Narain G. Hingorani, Flexible AC Transmission, IEEE Spectrum, April 1993, pp 40 – 45.

5. Narain G. Hingorani, High Power Electronics in Flexible AC Transmission, IEEE Power Engineering Review, 1998.

6. Elinar V. Larsen, Juan J Sanchez - Gasca Joe H. Chow, Concepts for design of FACTS controllers to damp power swings,

IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, Vol. 10, No. 2, May 1995.

11E008 POWER SYSTEM STABILITY

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To understand basic concept of stability.

• To study various types of stabilities and measures to improve them.

• To simulate the stability studies with the help of computers.

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to • Understand the concept of stability and steady state stability

• Demonstrate transient stability

• Analyze stability improvement and digital simmulation

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on power system analysis.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II† Model



Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction Concept of power system stability – Steady state stability – Transient stability – Importance of stability studies.

Importance of stability studies 9 Hours

Unit II

Steady State Stability

Two machine system and Clarke diagram – Multi machine systems and stability criteria – Method of small

oscillations – Voltage regulators and their effect on stability.

Method of small oscillations 9 Hours

Unit III

Transient Stability

Single and two machines systems – Swing equation and its solution by modified Euler’s and fourth order Runge-

Kutta method – Equal area criterion and its application – Combining machines – Stability of multi machine system.

142

Stability of multi machine system. 9 Hours

Unit IV

Stability Improvement

Factors affecting stability and methods of improving stability – Effect of excitation and speed governing system on

transient stability – Effect of inertia and damping.

Effect of inertia and damping. 9 Hours

Unit V

Digital Simulation Application of analog computers for stability studies – Digital simulation methods for transient stability studies.

Digital simulation methods for transient stability studies. 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. E.W. Kimbark, Power System Stability, Vol. I & III, John Wiley, 1995.

Reference(s)

1. Prabha Kundur, Power System Stability and Control, McGraw Hill, 1993. 2. Olle. I. Elgerd, Electric Energy Systems Theory – An Introduction, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi,

2003.

3. I.J.Nagrath. and D.P.Kothari, Modern Power System Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 1990.

4. M.A.Pai, Computer Techniques in Power System Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2003

Objectives

11E009 HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3.0

• To introduce the conduction and breakdown of gaseous insulating materials.

• To introduce the breakdown mechanisms in liquid and solid dielectrics.

• To study the generation of high DC voltages and high frequency AC voltages.

• To study the measurement of high voltages and currents.

• To study the different types of tests on insulators, bushings, circuit breakers, transformers and cables.

Program Outcomes





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Demonstrate Conduction and Breakdown of Gaseouts Insulation Materials, Liquid and Solid Dielectrics

2. Understand generation and measurements of high voltage and currents

3. Do high voltage testing

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on powersystem & electron devices.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II† Model



Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Conduction and Breakdown of Gaseouts Insulation Materials

Ionization process and current growth - Townsend's criterion for breakdown- breakdown in electronegative gases-time lags for

breakdown -Paschen's law - corona discharges - breakdown in non - uniform fields- factors to be considered for selecting gases as

insulating material.

Breakdown in Non – Uniform fields and Corona Discharges, Applications in high voltage Bushings 9 Hours

Unit II

Conduction and Breakdown in Liquid and Solid Dielectrics Breakdown mechanisms in liquid dielectrics-liquid dielectrics used in practice-various processes of breakdown in solid dielectrics- solid dielectrics -solid dielectrics used in practice.

Solid dielectrics 9 Hours

144

Unit III

Generation of High Voltage and Currents Generation of high DC voltages - multiplier circuits -Van de Graff generator - high alternating voltage generation using cascade

transformers-production of high frequency AC high voltages-standard impulse wave shapes-Marx circuit-generation of switching

surges-impulse current generation-tripping and control of impulse generators.

Marx circuit-generation of switching surges 9 Hours

Unit IV Measurement of High Voltages and Currents

HVDC measurement techniques - measurement of power frequency A.C voltages-sphere gap measurement technique-potential divider for impulse voltage measurements-measurement of high D.C, A.C and impulse currents-use of CRO for impulse voltage and

current measurements.

Use of CRO for impulse voltage and current measurements. 9 Hours

Unit V

High Voltage Testing Tests on insulators-testing of bushings-testing of isolators and circuit breakers-cable testing-testing of transformers-surge divertor

testing-radio interference measurement-use of I.S for testing.

Use of I.S for testing 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Text Book

1. M.S.Naidu, and Kamaraju, High Voltage Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2008. 2. C.L. Wadhwa, High Voltage Engineering Wiley Eastern Limited, 1994.

3.

References

1. E.Kuffel and M. Abdullah, High Voltage Engineering, Pergamon Press, 1970 2. Dieter Kind, An Introduction to High Voltage Experimental Technique Wiley Eastern Limited, 1978.

3. Alston, High Voltage TechnologyBS Publications, 2007.

11E010 ENERGY AUDITING CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT

Objectives

• Identifying the quality and cost of various energy inputs.

• Implementation of measures for energy conservation & realization of savings.

• To understand Energy Efficient motors, Lights & Design concepts

• To create awareness of energy saving methods & practices.

• Reduction of Actual Use of Electrical Energy and demand side management

3 0 0 3.0

• To identify basic concepts, calculation rules and systems for Energy Savings Calculations

• To minimize energy costs / waste without affecting production & quality

Program Outcome





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Demonstrate energy Scenario, Energy Management and Energy Audit

2. Learn Energy, Material balance and Energy action planning

3. Understand Financial Management.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on energy, tarrif, power systems. Assessment Pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model




Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Energy Scenario

Commercial Energy Production, Final Energy Consumption, Energy Needs of Growing Economy, Long Term Energy Scenario, Energy Pricing, Energy Sector Reforms, Energy and Environment: Air Pollution, Climate Change, Energy Security, Energy

Conservation and its Importance, Energy Strategy for the Future, Energy Conservation Act-2001 and its Features.

Energy Conservation Act-2001 and its Features. 9 Hours

Unit II

Energy Management & Audit

146

Definition, Energy audit- need, Types of energy audit,Energy management (audit) approach-understanding energy costs, Bench

marking, Energy performance, Matching energy use to requirement, Maximizing system efficiencies, Optimizing the input energy

requirements, Fuel and energy substitution, Energy audit instruments- Energy management in illumination and driver – case study –

Energy Efficient motors.

Energy Efficient motor 9 Hours

Unit III

Material and Energy balance

Facility as an energy system, Methods for preparing process flow, Material and energy balance diagrams. Material and energy balance diagrams 9 Hours

Unit IV Energy Action Planning

Key elements, Force field analysis, Energy policy purpose, perspective, Contents, Formulation, Ratification, Organizing - location of energy management, Top management support, Managerial function, Roles and responsibilities of energy manager, Accountability.

Motivating-motivation of employees: Information system designing barriers, Strategies; Marketing and communicating-training and

planning.

Marketing and communicating,training and planning 9 Hours

Unit V

Financial Management

Investment-need, Appraisal and criteria, Financial analysis techniques-Simple pay back period, Return on investment, Net present

value, Internal rate of return, Free cash flows, Risk and sensitivity analysis; Financing options, Energy performance contracts and

role of ESCOs-Simulation of systems on line tracking offincwcial – EVA modeling – cost of capital calculation.

EVA modeling – cost of capital calculation 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. H. Partab, Art and Science of Utilisation of Electrical Energy, Dhanpat Rai and Co, New Delhi, 2004.

References

1. BEE website .

2. NPC energy audit manual and reports

3. Wayne C. Turner, Energy management handbook, John Wiley and Sons, 1995

4. Guide to Energy Management, Cape Hart, Turner and Kennedy

5. Cleaner Production – Energy Efficiency Manual for GERIAP, UNEP, Bangkok prepared by National Productivity Council

www.eeca.govt.nz www.energyusernews.com

11E011 POWER QUALITY PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

Objectives

• To study the power quality problems in grid connected system and isolated systems.

• To study the various power quality issues and mitigations techniques.

• To study about the various harmonics elimination methods.

3 0 0 3.0

Program Outcomes PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments,




development.

Course Outcomes


1. Know the different causes of power quality issues. 2. Understand the effect of harmonics and voltage fluctuations on power system performance. 3. Design the filters to mitigate harmonics and voltage fluctuations

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on power systems, high voltage engineering.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II† Model



Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction Definition of power quality - Power quality, Voltage quality - Power quality issues: Short duration voltage variations, Long duration

voltage variations, Transients, Waveform distortion, Voltage imbalance, Voltage fluctuation, Power frequency variations - Sources

and Effects of power quality problems - Power quality terms - Power quality and Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standards.

CBEMA & ITI curves.

Voltage during the interruption, Monitoring of short interruptions 9 Hours

Unit II

Short Interruptions and Long Interruptions Short Interruptions - Introduction - Origin of short interruptions: Voltage magnitude events due to reclosing, Voltage during the

interruption- Monitoring of short interruptions - End user issues: Influence on Induction motors, Synchronous motors, Adjustable

speed drives. Long Interruptions Definition - Terminology: Failure, Outage, Interruption - Origin of interruptions - Causes of long

interruptions - Principles of regulating the voltage - Voltage regulating devices, Applications: Utility side, End-User side .

148

Overview of mitigation methods 9 Hours

Unit III Voltage Sags and Transients

Voltage Sag-Introduction - Definition - Characterization: Magnitude, Duration - Causes of Voltage Sag - Three Phase Unbalance - Phase angle jumps - Load influence on voltage sags - Overview of mitigation methods.Transients Definition - Principles of over

voltage protection - Types and causes of transients - Devices for over voltage protection - Utility capacitor switching transients -

Utility lightning protection – Waveform Distortion

Waveform Distortion 9 Hours

Unit IV

Harmonics Introduction - Definition and terms in Harmonics, Harmonics indices, Inter harmonics, Notching - Voltage Vs Current distortion -

Harmonics Vs Transients - Sources and effects of harmonic distortion - System response characteristics - Principles of controlling

harmonics - Standards and limitation - Mitigation and control techniques. Mitigation and control techniques 9 Hours

Unit V

Power Quality Solutions Introduction - Power quality monitoring: Need for power quality monitoring, Evolution of power quality monitoring, Deregulation

effect on power quality monitoring - Brief introduction to power quality - measurement equipments and power conditioning

equipments - Planning, Conducting and Analyzing power quality survey.

Planning, Conducting and Analyzing power quality survey 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. Dugan, Mark F. Mc Granaghan and H. Wayne Beaty, Electrical Power Systems Quality, NewYork, McGraw-Hill, 2002.

References

1. Barry W. Kennedy, Power Quality Primer, New York, McGraw-Hill, 2000. 2. C. Sankaran, Power Quality, Washington, CRC Press, 2001.

3. Math H.J. Bollen, Understanding Power Quality Problems: Voltage Sags and Interruptions, New York, IEEE Press, 1999.

4. J. Arriliaga, N.R. Watson and S. Chen, Power System Quality Assessment, England, John Wiley, & Sons, 2000.

Objectives

11E012 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION 3 0 0 3.0

• To provide an overview of Virtual instruments

• To bring out the overview of the software (LabVIEW).

• To know about the programming structure of the software.

• To familiarize the student with the Applications.

Program Outcomes



limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Acquire knowledge on how virtual instrumentation can be applied for data acquisition and instrument control.

2. Identify salient traits of a virtual instrument and incorporate these traits in their projects.

3. Experiment, analyze and document in the laboratory prototype measurement systems using a computer, plug-in DAQ

interfaces and bench level instruments.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on LABVIEW. Assessment Pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model




Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction General functional description of a digital instrument – Block diagram of a Virtual Instrument – Physical quantities

and analog interfaces – Hardware and software – User Interfaces – Advantages of Virtual Instruments over

conventional instruments – Architecture of a Virtual Instrument and a its relation to the operating system.

Advantages of Virtual Instruments over conventional instruments

9 Hours

Unit II

Software Overview

LabVIEW – Graphical user interfaces – Controls and indicators – ‘G’ programming – Labels and Text – Shape, size and color – Owned and free labels – Data type, Format, Precision and representation – Data types – Data flow

programming – Editing – Debugging and Running a Virtual Instrument – Graphical programming palettes and

tools – Front panel objects – Functions and libraries.

Functions and libraries 9 Hours

150

Unit III Programming Structure

FOR Loops, WHILE Loops, CASE Structure, Formula nodes, Sequence structures – Arrays and Clusters – Array Operations – Bundle – Bundle/Unbundle by name, graphs and charts – String and file I/O – High level and Low

level file I/O’s – Attribute modes Local and Global variables.

Attribute modes Local and Global variables 9 Hours

Unit IV

Operating System and Hardware Aspects

PC architecture, Current trends Operating system requirements, Drivers – Interface buses – PCI bus – Interface cards – Specification – Analog and Digital interfaces – Power, Speed and timing considerations. Installing

Hardware, Installing drivers – Configuring the hardware – Addressing the hardware in LabVIEW – Digital and

Analog I/O function – Data Acquisition – Buffered I/O – Real time Data Acquisition.

Real time Data Acquisition 9 Hours

Unit V LabVIEW Applications

IMAQ - Motion Control: General Applications – Feedback devices, Motor drives – Instrument connectivity – GPIB, Serial Communication – General, GPIB hardware & Software specifications – PX1 / PC1: Controller and

Chassis Configuration and Installation

PX1 / PC1: Controller and Chassis Configuration and Installation 9 Hours

Textbook

Total: 45 Hours

1. Garry M Johnson, Labview Graphical Programming, Tata McGraw Hill book Co, New Delhi, 2006

References

1. LabVIEW : Basics I & II Manual , National Instruments, Bangalore, 2011

2. Jeffrey Travis and Jim Kring , LabVIEW for Everyone: Graphical Programming made Easy and Fun, Tata McGraw Hill book

Co, New Delhi, 2006.

11E013 ILLUMINATION ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To impart knowledge on illumination

• To determine the calculation and measurement of illumination

Program Outcomes





development.

Course Outcomes


1. Acquire knowledge on illumination

2. Acquire knowledge on various light sources

3. Ability to apply the knowledge of illumination to the design of interior and exterior lighting

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge on energy, power.

Assessment Pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model




Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Language of Light & Lighting Eye & vision, Light & Lighting, Light & Vision, Light & Color , Basic Concepts and Units, Photometry and Measurement, Quantit y

and Quality of Lighting.

Quantity and Quality of Lighting 9 Hours

Unit II

Accessories Light sources: Daylight, Incandescent, Electric Discharge, Fluorescent, Arc lamps, Lasers, Neon signs, LED - LCD displays, Luminaries, Wiring, Switching & Control circuits.

Switching & Control circuits 9 Hours

Unit III

Calculation and Measurement

Polar curves, Effect of voltage variation on efficiency and life of lamps, Lighting calculations, Solid angle, Inverse square and cosine laws, Illumination from point, line and surface sources. Photometry and Spectro - photometry, photocells.

Photocells 9 Hours

Unit IV

152

Interior Lighting

Lighting design procedure for Industrial, Residential, Office, Departmental stores, Indoor stadium, Theatres and Hospitals.

Theatres and Hospitals 9 Hours

Unit V

Exterior Lighting Environment and glare, Lighting Design procedure for Flood, Street, Aviation and Transport lighting,

Lighting for Displays and Signaling.

Lighting for Displays and Signaling 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Text Book

Joseph B. Murdoch, Illumination Engineering from Edison’s Lamp to the Laser, Visions Communications, Washington DC, USA, 1994.

References

1. Jack L. Lindsey, Applied Illumination Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008. 2. Marc Schiler, Simplified Design of Building Lighting, John Wiley and Sons, 1997.

3. IES Lighting Handbook, 1993.

11E014 INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY AND SAFETY 3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To know the safety measures in process plans and high pressure operations

• To understand industrial hazards and safety training

• To know first aid principles and methods

• To know legal aspects of industrial safety

• To know pollution control acts for water – air and land

Program Outcomes


design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public

health and safety, cultural, societal and environmental considerations.

Course Outcomes


1. The graduates will demonstrate skills to use modern Engineering tools, software and equipments to analyze problems.

2. The graduates will display professional and ethical Behaviour

3. Understand fundamental concepts and research findings of industrial psychology

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in Power plant .

Assessment Pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model




Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Safety in Process Plants

Hazards analysis - Energy source – Release of hazardous materials – Fires – Types of fires – Fire extinguishers – types and handling. Personal protective equipments – Types – Helmets – Respirator – Air purification – Chemical protective clothing – gloves for heat –

electricity and chemical – Eye stakes – Ear marks – Industrial Hygiene – Principles – Health and safety Ergonomics.

Health and safety Ergonomics 9 Hours

Unit II High Pressure Operations

Pressure vessels – Storage – Handling – Transportation – Storage of liquids and gases under high pressure – Materials of construction – safety precautions. Explosive chemicals – handling and storage – Testing of such chemical.

Explosive chemicals, handling and storage 9 Hours

Unit III

Hazards in Industries

Engineering control of hazards and accidents due to fire explosion and natural causes in the Industries – Thermal power plant – Atomic power plant – mining industries – Fertilizers – petroleum refinery – Guide lines for setting standards for safe equipments and

safe operation in the above industries.

Petroleum refinery 9 Hours

Unit IV

Safety Education Types of organization – Safety committee – Safety councils – Safety education – First aid – Principles and methods – Training.

First aid 9 Hours

Unit V

Industrial Safety Acts Legal aspects of Industrial safety – Safety measures in factories act – Mines act – pollution control acts for water – air and land – child labour and women employee acts.

Child labour and women employee acts 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook(s)

1. Rolland P. Blake, Industrial safety, Prentice Hall Inc. New york, Latest Edition,2006 2. Willaim Handley Mc, Industrial Safety Hand book, Graw Hill Book Co., U. K.1977

References

1. Dan paterson , Techniques of safety Management, Mc Graw Hill - Kogakusha , New Delhi 1978 2. John Wiley, Occupational Accident Prevention Judson & Brown , London 1944.

3. John D. Constancs and Marcel Dekker, Controling air In-plant Air Borne contaminantsInc .New york 1983.

154

Objectives

11E015 BIO-MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION 3 0 0 3.0

• To know about the role of instrumentation in Bio medical applications

• To develop a clear view about ECG, EMG and ERG

• To analyze parameters of medical imaging and its measurements

Program Outcomes.





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Acquire basic knowledge on human physiology and understand the basic components of a biomedical

system.

2. Understand the measurement of various physiological measurements like ECG,EEG,EMG and non -

electrical parameters.

3. Able to measure the parameters of medical imaging system and therapeutic devices.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in Measurement & instrumentation.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II† Model



Total 100 100 100 100 Unit I

Human Physiology and Bio Potential Electrodes

Cell and their structures – Action and resting potential – Nervous system: Functional organisation of the nervous system – Structure of nervous system, neurons - synapse –transmitters and neural communication – Cardiovascular system– Basic components of a

biomedical system -Different types of electrodes – Sensors used in biomedicine – Selection criteria for transducers and electrodes –

Electrical safety – Grounding and isolation.

Grounding and isolation 9 Hours

Unit II

Electro – Physiological and Blood Flow Measurement ECG – EEG – EMG – ERG – Lead system and recording methods – Typical waveforms –Electromagnetic and Ultrasonic Blood flow

meters.

Ultrasonic Blood flow meter 9 Hours

Unit III

Non – Electrical Parameter Measurement Measurement of blood pressure – Blood flow cardiac output – Cardiac rate – Heart sound – Measurement of gas volume – Flow rate

of CO2 and O2 in exhaust air – pH of blood – ESR and GSR measurements.

ESR and GSR measurements 9 Hours

Unit IV

Medical Imaging Parameter Measurements and Blood Cell Counting X- RAY machine – Computer tomography – Magnetic resonance imaging system – Ultra sonography – Endoscopy – Bio-telemetry –

Manual and automatic counting of RBC, WBC and Platelets.

WBC and Platelets 9Hours

Unit V

Assisting and Therapeutic Devices Cardiac pacemakers – Defibrillators - Ventilators – Muscle stimulators –Heart lung machine – Dialysers - Limb prosthetics –

Orthotics – Elements of audio and visual aids.

Elements of audio and visual aids 9Hours

Total: 45Hours

Text Book(s)

1. R.S.Khandpur, ‘Hand Book of Bio-Medical instrumentation’, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd., 2003 2. J.G. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation: Application and Design”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2010

References

1. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007 2. G. Well, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1996

3. Jackson and Webster, “Medicine and Clinical Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 1996

156

11E016 VALUE ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To understand the concept of value engineering in order to reduce cost of product or process or service.

• To implement creative and innovative techniques using FAST diagram.

• To study benefits of VE for various industries.

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course Outcomes


1. Know Value engineering and Value analysis

2. Understand Functional Analysis.

3. communicate professionally and improve presentation skills.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in ethics

Assessment Pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model



3 Apply 20 20 20 20 4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20 5 Create 40 40 40 40 Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I Introduction to value engineering & value analysis

Historical perspective of Value Engineering ; Aims and objectives of Value Engineering ; Concept of Value; Value Engineering concerned with Economic Value ; VE Job plan ; Problem identification and selection of projects.

Problem identification and selection of projects 9 Hours

Unit II

Functional Analysis

Function-Cost-Worth analysis: Function Analysis System Technique (FAST); Review of principles of engineering economics.

Review of principles of engineering economics 9 Hours

Unit III

Meaning of Creativity

Creativity Techniques and Innovation; Idea judgment and evaluation- Six thinking hats. Six thinking hats 9 Hours

Unit IV

Human Aspects in Value Engineering

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model




3 Apply 25 25 25 25

Team building; Life cycle costing; Managing VE Study; VE Report writing; Presentation Skill - Individual and Team Presentations;

Implementation and follow-up.

Implementation and follow-up 9 Hours

Unit V

Benefits of Value Engineering

VE Case studies in the Industries like Manufacturing; Construction; Health Care; Process; Information Technology.

Information Technology 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Text Book

1. Anil Kumar Mukhopadhyaya, Value Engineering Mastermind – From Concepts to Certification, Response. Business Books

from SAGE, Los Angeles / London / New Delhi / Singapore / Washington DC, 2009.

References

1. Anil Kumar Mukhopadhyaya, Value Engineering –Concepts, Techniques and Applications, Response Books, A Division of SAGE Publications, New Delhi / Thousand Oaks / London, 2003.

2. R. D. Miles, Techniques of Value analysis & Engineering, McGraw Hill, 2000.

3. E. Midge Arthur, Value Engineering -A Systematic Approach, McGraw Hill Book Co., New York, 2000.

4. Zimmerman, Value Engineering - A Practical Approach, CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi, 2000.

11E017 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING 3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To study the image fundamentals and mathematical transforms necessary for image processing

• To know about the various image restoration, image enhancements, image encoding and image

compression techniques

Program Outcomes





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Understand digital image fundamentals and Image transforms

2. Analyze about the Image Filtering and Image Encoding.

3. Apply principles and techniques of digital image processing in all applications

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in DSP.

Assessment Pattern

158

4 Analyze / Evaluate 25 25 25 25 5 Create 10 10 10 10

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Digital Image Fundamentals

Elements of a Digital Image Processing System – Structure of the human eye – Image formation and contrast sensitivity – Sampling and Quantization – Neighbors of a pixel – Distance measures – Photographic film structure

and exposure – Linear scanner – Video camera – Image processing applications.

Video camera – Image processing applications 9 Hours

Unit II

Image Transforms Introduction to Fourier Transform – DFT – Properties of two dimensional FT – Separability, Translation,

Periodicity, Rotation, Average value – FFT Algorithm – Walsh Transform – Hadamard transform – Discrete

Cosine Transform.

Discrete Cosine Transform 9 Hours

Unit III

Image Enhancement

Definition – Spatial Domain Methods – Frequency Domain methods – Histogram modification Techniques – Neighborhood averaging – Median filtering – Low Pass Filtering – Averaging of Multiple Images – Image

shaping by differentiation and high pass filtering.

Image shaping by differentiation and high pass filtering

9 Hours

Unit IV

Image Restoration Definition – Degradation model – Discrete formulation – Circulant matrices – Block Circulant matrices – Effect of diagnolization of circulant matrices – Unconstrained and constrained restorations – Inverse Filtering – Wiener

Filter – Restoration in Spatial Domain.

Restoration in Spatial Domain 9 Hours

Unit V

Image Encoding Objective and subjective fidelity criteria – Basic encoding process – Mapping – Quantizer – Coder – Differential

encoding – Run length encoding – Image encoding relative to fidelity criterion – Differential Pulse Code

Modulation.

Differential Pulse Code Modulation 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Text Book

1. Rafael C Gonzalez and Paul Wintz, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education New Delhi 2003.

References

1. Rafael C Gonzalez and Richard E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing using Matlab”, Pearson Education New Delhi 2004

2. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, PHI / Pearson Education New Delhi 2003

3. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Wiley and Sons. USA 2000

160

11E018 PLC AND AUTOMATION

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To impart knowledge on Programmable Logic Controller and Automation

• To design controller for industrial automation system

Program Outcomes





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Acquiring knowledge on Programmable Logic Controllers

2. Acquiring knowledge on DCS

3. Apply the knowledge of programming of PLC to various industrial automation systems

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in control system

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II† Model



Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Programmable Logic Controllers Basics of PLC - Architecture of PLC - Advantages - Types of PLC - Introduction to PLC Networking- Networking standards - Protocols - Field bus - Process bus and Ethernet IEEE Standard.

Process bus and Ethernet IEEE Standard 9 Hours

Unit II

Programming of PLC & HMI Systems Programming of PLC Types of Programming - Simple process control programs using Relay Ladder Logic and Boolean logic methods - PLC arithmetic

functions - Introduction to advanced programming methods.

HMI systems: Necessity and Role in Industrial Automation, Text display - operator panels - Touch panels - Panel PCs - Integrated

displays (PLC & HMI).

Introduction to advanced programming methods 9 Hours

Unit III

Distributed Control Systems (DCS) Difference between SCADA system and DCS – architecture – local control unit – programming language – communication facilities

– operator interface – engineering interfaces.

Engineering Interfaces 9 Hours

Unit IV

Applications of PLC & DCS

Case studies of Machine automation, Process automation, Introduction to SCADA Comparison between SCADA and DCS.

Case studies of process automation 9 Hours

Unit V

Automation Factory Automation: Flexible Manufacturing Systems concept – Automatic feeding lines, ASRS, transfer lines, automatic inspection – Computer Integrated Manufacture – CNC, intelligent automation, Industrial networking, bus standards, HMI Systems, DCS and

SCADA, Wireless controls.

Wireless controls 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. John.W.Webb & Ronald A. Reis, Programmable logic controllers: Principles and Applications,Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

References

1. Michael P. Lukas, Distributed Control systems, Van Nostrand Reinfold Company, 1995. 2. Gary Dunning, Introduction to Programmable Logic Controllers, Thomson Press, USA, 2005.

3. W. Bolton, Programmable Logic Controllers, Elsevier India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2008.

4. Mikell P. Groover, Automation Production systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing,

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.

162

Objectives

11E019 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 3 0 0 3.0

• To impart detailed knowledge on thermal power plant

• To learn the measurements of various parameter in power plant and their control

Program Outcomes



limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Understand and design of Thermal power plants

2. Design instrumentation systems for electricity generating plants

3. Explain Boiler and Turbine monitoring in electricity generation

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in Power systems

Assessment Pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model




Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I General Concepts

Importance of instrumentation and automation in power plants - Thermal power plants - Complete layout of Boiler, Turbine and auxillaries - Process and instrumentation diagram of thermal power plant - distributed digital control system in power

plants - co-generation plants.

Co-generation plants 9 Hours

Unit II

Measurements in Power Plants

Use of transducers in electrical measurements and function of synchroscope - measurement of non-electrical parameters - measurement of steam pressure and temperature and boiler tube metal temperature - Need for seal pots and condensing pots -

primary sensing elements for flow measurements - measurement of flow of feed water, steam & air with focus on impulse pipe

routing - Drum level measurement - DP and hydra step methods - use of correction factors, need for pressure, temperature,

flow and level switches.

Drum level measurement 9 Hours

Unit III

Analyzers in Power Plants

Flue gas analysis - oxygen analyzer - CO analyzer - analysis of impurities in feed water and steam - conductivity and dissolved oxygen analyzers - Gas chromatography - PH meter - pollution monitoring instruments for NOX and SOX measurements,

smoke density measurements, dust monitors.

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model


Examination

Dust monitors 9 Hours

Unit IV

Control Loops in Boiler

Combustion control - air fuel ratio control furnace draft control - drum level control - steam temperature control and attemperation - Deaerator control interlocks in boiler operation.

Deaerator control interlocks in boiler operation 9 Hours

Unit V

Turbine Monitoring and Control Speed measurement, vibration and eccentricity measurement, shell expansion and differential expansion measurement - shell

temperature monitoring and control - lubricating oil temperature control - cooling system, protection and interlocks in turbines.

Interlocks in turbines 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Text Book

1. Sam G.Dukelow, The control of Boilers, instrument society of America, 1991.

Reference Books

1. S. M. Elonka, and A. L. Kohan, Standard Boilers Operations, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1994. 2. R.K.Jain, Mechanical and industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1995.

3. Modern power station practice, Vol.6, Instrumentation, Controls and Testing, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1971.

11E020 AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To study the electronic instruments for automobiles.

• To study the advanced electronics instruments for ignition and braking systems.

Program Outcomes



limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Provide an introduction and a deep knowledge in various ignition and instrumentation systems in vehicles.

2. Can able to model and stimulate the various modern electronics automotive systems by using various numerical analysis

and simulation tools

3. Formulate and solves electronic engineering challenges related to the most representative automotive systems using the

classical and modern methodologies in electronics engineering.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in Electronics.

Assessment Pattern

164

1 Remember 10 10 10 10 2 Understand 20 20 20 20


Total 100 100 100 100

Unit-I

Introduction : Automotive component operation Electrical wiring terminals and switching Multiplexed wiring systems

Circuit diagrams and symbols. Charging Systems and Starting Systems : Charging systems principles alternations and charging circuits New developments requirements of the starting system Basic starting circuit.

Charging Systems and Starting Systems 9 Hours

Unit-II Ignition systems: Ignition fundamental, Electronic ignition systems. Programmed ignition distribution less ignition direct

ignition spark plugs. Electronic Fuel Control : Basics of combusion Engine fuelling and exhaust emissions Electronic

control of carburation Petrol fuel injection Diesel fuel injection.

Diesel fuel injection 9 Hours

Unit-III

Instrumentation Systems: Introduction to instrumentation systems Various sensors used for different parameters sensing Driver instrumentation systems vehicle condition monitoring trip computer different types of visual display

Different types of visual display 9 Hours

Unit-IV

Electronic control of braking and traction introduction and discription control elements and control methodology Electronic control of Automatic Transmission: Introduction and description Control of gear shift and torque

converter lockup Electric power steering Electronic clutch.

Control of gear shift 9 Hours

Unit-V

Engine Management Systems: Combined ignition and fuel management systems Exhaust emission control Digital control techniques Complete vehicle control systems Artificial intelligence and engine management Automotive Microprocessor

uses.

Lighting and Security Systems: Vehicles lighting Circuits Signaling Circuit Central locking and electric windows security systems Airbags and seat belt tensioners Miscellaneous safety and comfort systems

Comfort systems 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Text book 1.TOM DENTON, Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems, Edward Arnold pb., 1995

References

1. DON KNOWLES, Automotive Electronic and Computer controlled Ignition Systems, 2. Don Knowles, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey 1988.

3. WILLIAM, T.M., Automotive Mechanics, McGraw Hill Book Co.,

4. WILLIAM, T.M., Automotive Electronic Systems, Heiemann Ltd., London ,1978.

5. Ronald K Jurgen, Automotive Electronics Handbook, McGraw Hill, Inc, 1999.

11E021 BIO – MEDICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To study about the basics of signals and systems and bio – electric potentials.

• To learn about the various correlation and estimation techniques and apply them for ECG, EEG and EMG signal processing.

Program Outcomes





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Understand Basic knowledge on continuous, discrete time Signals & systems

2. Analyze various signals by different transforms

3. Describe the origin, properties and suitable models of important biological signals such as ECG, EEG and EMG.

4. Analyze the frequency content of the signal &design digital filters to remove noise

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in signals and systems.

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II† Model



3 Apply 20 20 20 20

4 Analyze / Evaluate

40

40

40

40

5 Create 10 10 10 10 Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Signals and Systems Basics Essentials of continuous time signals and systems – convolutions – Fourier transforms – Systems transfer functions – Sampling and Quantization – Discrete time signals and systems – Frequency analysis of discrete systems – Discrete

transforms – Examples of physiological signals and systems including feedback systems.

Discrete transforms 9 Hours

Unit II Bio – Electric Potentials

Genesis and significance of bio – electric potentials – ECG, EEG, EMG and their monitoring and measurement – Spectral analysis – Digital and analog filter.

Digital and analog filter 9 Hours

Unit III

Correlation and Estimation Techniques

166

ECG, Pre-processing – Waveform recognition – Morphological studies and rhythm analysis – Automated diagnosis on

decision theory – ECG compression – Evoked potential estimation.

Evoked potential estimation 9 Hours

Unit IV

ECG and EEG Signal Processing ECG – Evoked responses – Averaging Techniques – Pattern recognition of alpha, beta, theta, and delta waves in ECG - EEG - Analysis of EEG – Sleeping stages – Epilepsy detection.

Epilepsy detection 9 Hours

Unit V

EMG Signal Processing EMG – Motor potentials – Stimulation pulse characteristics – Wave pattern studies – Biofeedback – Psycho – Neuro immunology – Motor nerves – Signal processing – Neuro muscular delay.

Neuro muscular delay 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. H. Taub & D.Schilling, Digital Integrated Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.

References

1. S.R.Devasahayam, Biomedical signal processing, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2001. 2. R.E.Chelling and R.I.Kithey, Bio medical signal processing in IV parts, medical & biological engineering and computing ,

1990-1991.

3. A.V.Oppenheim, A.S.Willsky & H.S. Narvals, Signals and Systems, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 1997.

4. R.A.Gabel and R.A.Robert, Signals and linear systems, John Wiley and sons, New York, 1987.

5. C.T. Chen, Systems and signal analysis, Saunder’s college Publications, New Delhi 1996.

11E022 PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION

3 0 0 3 .0

Objectives

• To analyze mathematical modeling of various types of controllers with their characteristics

• To understand tuning of parameters in controllers

• To study types & selection of control valves and piping diagrams

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Acquire knowledge in designing AC and DC bridges

2. Apply statistical analyze to data samples to calculate mean, S.D etc and to determine accuracy, precision and sensitivity of

sensors and instruments

3. Evaluate the methodologies for minimizing measurement errors and to identify measurement uncertainty components

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in M&I and control system

Assessment Pattern

168

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model




Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Introduction Need for process control – mathematical model of first – order level, pressure and thermal processes – higher order process – interacting and non-interacting systems – continuous and batch process – self-regulation – servo and regulator operation.

Mathematical model of first order level, pressure and thermal processes. 9 Hours

Unit II Controller Characteristics

Basic control actions - characteristics of On-Off, proportional, single speed floating, integral and derivative control modes - composite control modes – P/I, P/D and P/I/D control modes - response of controller for different types of test inputs - integral

windup - auto manual transfer – Electronic controllers to realize various control actions - selection of control mode for different

processes - typical control schemes for level, flow, pressure and temperature. Simulation study of control modes in simple

systems using.

Basics of P, PI, PD, PID controller. 9 Hours

Unit III

Tuning of Controllers Optimum controller settings - Evaluation criteria-IAE, ISE and ITAE - ¼ decay ratio – Tuning of controllers by process reaction

curve method - damped oscillation method - Ziegler-Nichol's tuning – Cohencoon method-Feed forward control - ratio control -

cascaded control - averaging control - multivariable control – Selective control systems – split range control – Adaptive and

inferential control. Simulation study of controller-tuning using SIMULINK.

Feed forward control 9 Hours

Unit – IV

Final Control Element

I/P and P/I converters - pneumatic and electric actuators - valve positioner - control valve - characteristics of control valves - valve

body - globe, butterfly, diaphargm, ball valves - control valve sizing - cavitation, flashing in control valves. Response of pneumatic

transmission lines and valves.

control valves 9 Hours

Unit – V

Selected Unit Operations Distillation column - control of top and bottom product compositions - reflux ratio - control of chemical reactor - control of heat

exchanger. Steam boiler - drum level control and combustion control. Piping and Instrumentation Diagram of control loops.

Heat exchanger and stream boiler 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. G.Stephanopoulos, Chemical Process Control, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2012.

References

1. D.P.Eckman, Automatic Process Control, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2009. 2. A. Pollard, Process Control, Heinemann educational books, London, 1971

3. P.Harriott, Process Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2008.

4. B.Wayue Begwtte, Process control: modeling, Design and simulation, PHI learning Pvt, Ltd.New Delhi 2008.

11E023 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To become familiar with propagation of signals through lines

• To have an introduction on different analog modulation schemes.

• To study about various types of network Protocol

• To introduce the various optical fiber modes, configurations and various signal degradation factors associated with optical

fiber

Program Outcomes



development.


with the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective

reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.

Course Outcomes


1. Know about the transmission medium.

2. Understand about analog and digital communication.

3. Gather knowledge on satellite and optical fibre communication

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in electronic circuits.

Assessment Pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II† Model



3 Apply 20 20 20 20 4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40 5 Create 10 10 10 10 Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Transmission Medium Transmission lines – Types, equivalent circuit, losses, standing waves, impedance matching, bandwidth; radio propagation – Ground wave and space wave propagation, critical frequency, maximum usable

frequency, path loss, white Gaussian noise.

Ground wave and space wave propagation 9 Hours

Unit II

Analog Communication

Amplitude modulation and demodulation circuits – Frequency modulation and demodulation circuits - Super heterodyne radio receiver

Amplitude modulation and demodulation circuits 9 Hours

Unit III

Digital Communication

170

Pulse code modulation, time division multiplexing, digital T-carrier system. Digital radio system. Digital modulation, Frequency and

phase shift keying – Modulator and demodulator, bit error rate calculation.

Digital radio system 9 Hours

Unit IV

Data Communication and Network Protocol Data Communication codes, error control. Serial and parallel interface, telephone network, data modem, ISDN, LAN, ISO-OSI seven layer architecture for WAN.

OSI seven layer architecture for WAN 9 Hours

Unit V

Satellite and Optical Fibre Communications Orbital satellites, geostationary satellites, look angles, satellite system link models, satellite system link equations; advantages of optical fibre communication - Light propagation through fibre, fibre loss, light sources and detectors.

Light propagation through fibre, fibre loss, light sources and detectors 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communication Systems, Pearson Education Asia Ltd, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2001

References 1. Roy Blake, Electronic Communication Systems, Thomson Delmar Ltd, , New York, 2002

2. William Schweber, Electronic Communication Systems, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, Indid, New York, 2002

3. Kennedy G, Electronic Communication Systems, McGraw Hill book Co, , New York, 2002

4. Miller, Modern Electronic Communication, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003

11E024 COMPUTER NETWORKS

Objectives

3 0 0 3.0

• To detect & correct errors and apply link control and link protocols of data link layer.

• To apply access method, electrical specification and implementation of different networks, types of

switching

• To understand the concepts of layering in networking

• To provide the knowledge about various protocols used in different layers of networks.

• To gain knowledge about applications of networks.

Program Outcomes



limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Understand the organization of computer networks, factors influencing computer network

management

2. Know about the network and transport layers

3. Analyze the network management

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in network.

Assessment Pattern

S.No

Bloom’s Taxonomy

(New Version)

†

Test I

†

Test II

Model

Examination†

Semester End

Examination

Remember 10 10 10 10


3 Apply 20 20 20 20


5 Create 10 10 10 10

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Data Communication – An Overview Introduction: Networks – Protocols and Standards – Line configurations – Topology – Transmission mode – Categories of networks – OSI model & DOD Model: Functions of the layers – Transmission media: Guided media –

Unguided media – Transmission impairment – Performance.

Transmission impairment 9 Hours

Unit II

Medium Access Sub Layer & Data Link Layer Data link control: Service primitives – Flow control mechanisms – Stop and wait – Sliding window protocols – Error detection and correction: Types of errors – Error detection – Vertical Redundancy Check (VRC) –

Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC) – Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) – Check sum – Error correction –

Single bit error correction –Hamming Code formation – Medium Access Control Protocols: Conventional channel

allocation methods, pure ALOHA, S-ALOHA, IEEE Standards for LAN – Ethernet, Token Bus, Token Ring, FDDI.

Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC),Cyclic Redundancy check, Error correction 9 Hours

Unit III

Network & Transport Layers Networking and internetworking devices: Repeaters, Bridges, Gateways – Switching – Circuit and packet switching – Network layer design issues – Routing Algorithms – Congestion control algorithms – Principles of

internetworking – Internet addresses – TCP / IP protocol suite.

TCP / IP protocol suite 9 Hours

Unit IV

Presentation & Application Layers

Domain Name System (DNS) – Telnet – File Transfer Protocol (FTP) – Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) –

Electronic Mail – Overview of ISDN – ISDN protocols.

Overview of ISDN – ISDN protocols

Unit V

Network Management

9 Hours

Architecture of network management protocols - Information extraction - Configuration Management – Fault

Management – Performance management – Security Management – Cryptography – Case study – Substation

Automation.

Case study – Substation Automation 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

172

Textbooks

1. Behrouz A.Forouzan, Data Communication and Networking, Tata McGraw Hill Ltd, New Delhi, 2006.

2. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication, Pearson Education, Asia Ltd, 8th Edition, New

Delhi, 2003.

References

1. A.S.Kernel Explain, Communication Network Management, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi 2005 2. S. Andrew Tannenbaum Computer Networks, Pearson Education, Asia Ltd, New Delhi, 2003

3. Uylers Black, Network Management Standards, McGraw Hill book Co, New York 1995

Objectives

11O008 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR AND MANAGEMENT


3 0 0 3.0

• To enable the students to understand the perspectives of management.

• To give an insight about the functions of management like planning, organizing, staffing, leading, controlling.

• To familiarize the students with organizational culture and help them to manage change.

Programme Outcomes

PO11. An ability to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the

engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to

manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.

PO12: An ability to recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-long

learning in the broadest context of technological change.

Course Outcomess


1. The graduates will display professional and ethical Behavior.

2. The graduates will be able to communicate professionally.

3. Understand the importance of organisational behaviour in Business settings.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in

Assessment pattern

S. No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model

Examination†

Semester End

Examination

1 Remember 20 20 20 20


3 Apply 30 30 30 30 4 Analyze/ Evaluate 20 20 20 20 5 Create 10 10 10 10

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Management Overview Management - Definition, nature and purpose, Evolution of management, patterns of management Analysis, Functions of managers, management and society - Operation in a pluralistic society, Social responsibility of managers, Ethics in managing.

Ethics in managing 9 Hours

Unit II Management Functions - I

Planning: Objectives, Types, Steps, Process, policies. Organizing - Nature and purpose, Departmentation, Line and staff, Decentralization. Staffing - Selection, performance appraisal, career strategy.

Performance appraisal 9 Hours

Unit III

Management Functions-II

Leading - Human Factor in managing, Behavioral models, Creativity and innovation. Motivation –theories. Leadership - Ingredients of Leadership, Styles. Communication. Controlling – control Techniques.

Ingredients of Leadership 9 Hours

Unit IV

174

Organizational Behaviour

Meaning and importance of Organizational Behaviour, challenges and opportunities for Organizational Behaviour, Attitudes Job

satisfaction, personality and values. Perception, Groups and Teams, conflict management.

Attitudes Job satisfaction 9 Hours

Unit V

Organizational culture and Dynamics: Organizational Culture – Definition, Functions, creating and sustaining culture, creating an Ethical Organizational culture.

Organizational change – forces for change, managing change, change agents, resistance to change, approaches to managing

organizational change, Organizational Development in intervention.

Organizational Development in intervention 9 Hours

Total : 45 Hours Text Book

1. Herold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, Essentials of Management, Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

References

1. Robbins, Judge, Sanghi, Organizational Behaviour, Pearson, 2009 2. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009

11E025 ADVANCED CONTROL ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0

Objective

To enable the students to have a fair knowledge about the use of mathematical techniques in

control system.

• To learn the concepts of state variable techniques, non-linear systems and basics of optimal and adaptive control.

• To learn the concepts of PLC, SCADA and DCS.





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Analyse state-space models for control systems.

2. Explain the concepts of controllability, observability and stabilizability

3. Design digital controllers for sampled data systems

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in control engineering

Assessment Pattern

176

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model †

Semester End


Total 100 100 100 100


Unit I

Controller Design System performance and specifications – Feedback compensators – Proportional Derivative (PD), Proportional Integral (PI) and PID controllers – Characteristics, Design – Manual and automatic tuning.

Mathematical modeling of the controller design 9 Hours

Unit II State Space System Theory Concept of State, state variable and state model – State model of linear system – State space representation using physical variables, phase variables, canonical variables – Decomposition of transfer functions - Direct decomposition, cascade decomposition and parallel decomposition - Transforming general state model into canonical model – Derivation of transfer function matrix

Derivation of transfer function matrix 9 Hours

Unit III

Solution of State Equation

State transition matrix and its properties – Computation using Laplace transform method, canonical transformation

method, Cayley Hamilton method – Controllability and Observability of systems – Pole placement by state feed back – Observer systems.

Controllability of systems 9 Hours

Unit IV Nonlinear Systems Introduction – Properties of nonlinear systems – Describing function for nonlinearities, on-off relay, dead zone, saturation and relay with hysteresis – Phase plane analysis – Concept of singular points – Construction of phase

plane trajectory, using isocline method, Lienard construction and Delta method.

Phase plane analysis 9 Hours

Unit V

Computer control of systems Introduction to RTU – IED - Programmable Logic Controllers, SCADA, Distributed Control Systems –

Applications Applications of SCAD

Textbook

1. K. Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.

References

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

1. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New Age International Publishers, New

Delhi, 2008. 2. Richard C. Dorf and Rober H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson Education, New Delhi,

2008.

3. Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.. 4. John W. Webb and Ronald A. Resis, Programmable Logic Controller, Prentice Hall of India

Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 1999.

5. Michael P Lukas, Distributed Control Systems, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, New York

1995.

Objectives

11E026 DIGITAL

CONTROL SYSTEM

3 0 0 3.0

• To equip the students with the basic knowledge of A/D and D/A conversion

• To study the stability analysis of digital control system

• Model simple control systems in terms of differential and difference equations

• Model systems in the time domain and design feedback controllers based on various algorithms

• Ability to model or to identify a discrete-time system with a linear input-output relation.

Program Outcomes

b) an ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze and interpret data.

e) an ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems

Course Outcomes

• Evaluate properties of control systems using frequency domain methods.

• Describe the concepts of digital control systems

• Design digital controllers for sampled data systems

• Analyse state-space models for control systems.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in control system

Assessment Pattern

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Mode l

Examination

Semester End

Examination


Total 100 100 10 10

Unit I Digital Control System

Digital control system – Sample and hold – Analog to digital converter – Digital to analog converter – Quantizing

and quantizing error – Sampling process – Frequency response of zero order hold – First order hold – PI, PD

Controllers – Digital PID controllers.

Frequency response of first order hold. 9 Hours

Unit II Response of Discrete System Pulse transfer function of cascaded elements, closed loop systems – Characteristic equation – Relationship between

s-plane and z-plane poles – Unit step response of digital control system – Stability of discrete system – jury’s stability test – Root locus technique for digital system.

Pulse transfer function of closed loop systems 9 Hours

Unit III State Space Representation

State variable formulation of discrete system – Decomposition of discrete transfer function – Direct decomposition – Cascade decomposition and parallel decomposition – Solution of state equation by recursive method – state

transition matrix and its properties.

Parallel decomposition of discrete transfer function 9 Hours

178

Unit IV Solution of State Equation

Solution of discrete time state equation – Evaluation of state transition matrix – Transfer function matrix –

Discretisation of continuous time system.

Solution of discrete time state equation by Cayley-Hamilton theorem. 9 Hours

Unit V

Compensation Techniques Compensation by continuous network – Compensation by digital computer – Frequency domain technique of

designing D(z). Designing D(z) based on Frequency domain specifications.

Textbooks

1. M. Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods” Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.

References

1. K. Ogata, “Discrete time control system” Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi 2006.

2. I.J. Nagarath and M. Gopal, “Control System Engineering” New age International P.Ltd, New

Delhi 2007. 9 Hours

Total : 45 Hours


† Model

† Semester End


Total 100 100 100 100

Objectives

11E027 NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL

3 0 0 3.0

• To provide the basic understanding of neural networks and fuzzy logic fundamentals, program the

related algorithms and design the required and related systems.

• To expose the concepts of feed forward and feedback neural networks.

• To train about the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems.

• To provide adequate knowledge about fuzzy set theor y and application of fuzzy logic control to

real time systems.

• To apply neural networks and fuzzy systems to model and solve complicated practical problems.

Program Outcomes



limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Expose the students to the concepts of feed forward neural networks.

2. Provide adequate knowledge about feedback neural networks

3. Acquire adequate knowledge of application of fuzzy logic control to real time systems.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in computer networks.

Assessment Pattern


Unit – I

Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks and Learning Laws Artificial neural networks and their biological motivation – Terminology – Models of neuron – Topology – characteristics of artificial neural networks – types of activation functions – learning methods – error correction learning – Hebbian learning – Perceptron – XOR Problem –Perceptron learning rule convergence theorem – Adeline.

Perceptron

9 Hours

Unit – II

Feed forward and Recurrent Neural Networks Feed forward networks: Multilayer Perceptron – Back Propagation learning algorithm – Universal function

approximation – Associative memory: auto association, heteroassociatio, recall and cross talk recurrent neural networks: Linear auto associator – Bi-directional associative memor y – Hopfield neural network –

180

Traveling Salesman Problem.

Hopfield neural network

Unit – III

Unsupervised Learning and Self Organizing Networks

9 Hours

Competitive learning neural networks – Max net – Mexican Hat – Hamming net – Kohenen Self organizing Feature Map – Counter propagation – Learning Vector Quantization – Adaptive Resonance Theory

Applications of neural networks in image processing, signal processing, modeling and control.

Applications of neural networks in medeling 9 Hours

Unit – IV Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Relations

Introduction – classical sets and fuzzy sets – classical relations and fuzzy relations – membership functions

– fuzzy to crisp conversions –fuzzy arithmetic, numbers, vectors, and extension principle.

Fuzzy arithmetic numbers 9 Hours

Unit – V

Fuzzy Decision Making and Neuro Fuzzy Classical logic and fuzzy logic – fuzzy rule based systems – fuzzy nonlinear simulation – fuzzy decision making – fuzzy control systems –fuzzy optimization – one-dimensional optimization. Mathematical formulation of adaptive neuro - fuzzy

inference systems.

Fuzzy inference systemsystem 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Text Book(s)

1. Jacek M. Zurada, Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems, Jaico Publishing home, 2002.

References 1. Laurance Fausett, N.J Englewood cliffs., Fundamentals of Neural Networks, Pearson Education,

1992. 2. H.J. Zimmermann, Fuzzy Set Theory & its Applications, Allied Publication Ltd., 1996.

3. Simon Haykin, Neural Networks, Pearson Education, 2003.

4. John Yen & Reza Langari, Fuzzy Logic – Intelligence Control & Information, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003.

5. Timothy J. Ross, Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, 1997.

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model †

Semester End


Total 100 100 100 100

11E028 EMBEDDED CONTROLLER APPLICATIONS IN POWER ELECTRONICS

3 0 0 3.0 Objectives

• To study the architecture and interfacing devices for various microcontrollers such as 8051 and

PIC.

• To generate the firing pulses for converters and inverters to control the drives





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Able to identify the hardware components that can be apart of an embedded system and that influence the choice

of the programming model used

2. Develop and debug simple computer programs for embedded system where the commutation with the

environment is done directly via the peripheral devices

3. Understand, program and implement an embedded system

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in embedded and power electronics.

Assessment Pattern


Unit I

8051 Architecture

Basic organization - 8051 CPU structure - Memory Organization – Addressing modes - Instruction set –

Programming – Timing diagram – Memory expansion.

Adressing modes

Unit II

Peripherals and Versions of 8051

9 Hours

Parallel Ports – Timers and Counters – Interrupts – Serial Communication – Simple Programs ADC, DAC

and Analog Comparator options in P87LPC769 – PWM and Watch dog timer options in P89C66x -

Assemblers and Compilers – Generation of .LST and .HEX files for applications using Keil / RIDE IDE.

Assemblers and compilers 9 Hours

Unit III

Architecture of PIC16f87XA

Architecture – CPU structure – Special features of CPU - Memory organization – Addressing modes –

Instruction set – Programming – Timing diagram – Memory expansion.

182

Instruction set 9 Hours

Unit IV

Peripherals and Interfacing of PIC16f87XA

I/O Ports – Timers / Counters – Capture / Compare / PWM modules – Master Synchronous Serial Port

(MSSP) module – USART – A / D Converter module – Comparator module - .LST and .HEX files

generation for applications using MpLab IDE.

A/D converter module 9 Hours

Unit V

Applications using 8051 and PIC16f87XA

Real Time Clock – DC motor speed control – Generation of gating signals for Converters and Inverters –

Frequency measurement – Temperature control – Speed control of induction motors – Implementation of

PID controller.

Temperature control 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbooks

1. Tim Wilmshurst, “Designing Embedded System with PIC Microcontrollers”, Second edition,

Newnes, Dec 17, 2009,

2. Lucio Di Jasio, Tim Wilmshurst, Dogan Ibrahim, “PIC Microcontrollers: Know it all”,

Newnes,2007

References

1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, JaniceGillispie Mazidi, Rolin D. McKinlay, The 8051 Microcontroller

and Embedded Systems- Using Assembly and C, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.

2. PIC16F87XA Data Sheet – DS39582B, Microchip Technology Inc., 2003

11E029 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND EXPERT SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

To apply the technique of intelligent agents and search methods.

• To apply decision making and reasoning in uncertain world.

• To construct plans and methods for generating knowledge.

• To apply the concepts of expert systems.

Program Outcomes



development.

Course Outcomes


• Understand the Overview of Artificial Intelligence.

• Apply the Artificial Intelligence Concepts and Algorithms.

• Understand the Expert system Models.

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in artificial intelligence

Assessment Pattern

184

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model †

Semester End


Total 100 100 100 100

Examination

Unit I Introduction Introduction to AI: Intelligent agents – Perception – Natural language processing – Problems solving agents

– Searching for solutions: Un informed search strategies – Informed search strategies.

Informed search strategies 9 Hours

Unit II

Knowledge and Reasoning Adversarial search – Optimal and imperfect decisions – Alpha, Beta pruning – Logical agents: Propositional logic – First order logic – Syntax and semantics – Using first order logic – Inference in first order logic.

Inference in first order logic 9 Hours

Unit III

Uncertain Knowledge and Reasoning Uncertainty – Acting under uncertainty – Basic probability notation – Axioms of probability – Baye’s rule – Probabilistic reasoning – Making simple decisions.

Probabilistic reasoning 9 Hours

Unit IV

Planning and Learning Planning: Planning problem – Partial order planning – Planning and acting in non-deterministic domains – Learning:

Learning decision trees – Knowledge in learning – Neural networks – Reinforcement learning – Passive and active.

Reinforcement Learning 9 Hours

Unit V

Expert Systems Definition – Features of an expert system – Organization – Characteristics – Prospector – Knowledge Representation in expert systems – Expert system tools – MYCIN – EMYCIN.

Expert sytem tool –EMYCIN 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours Textbooks

1. Stuart Russel and Peter Norvig, Artificial Intelligence - A Modern Approach, Pearson Education

Asia Ltd, New Delhi 2nd Edition 2003.

References 1. Donald A.Waterman, A Guide to Expert Systems, Pearson Education Asia Ltd, New Delhi 2007. 2. George F.Luger, Artificial Intelligence – Structures and Strategies for Complex Problem Solving”,

Pearson Education Asia Ltd, New Delhi 2002.

3. Elain Rich and Kevin Knight, Artificial Intelligence, Tata McGraw Hill book Co Ltd, New Delhi,

1995.

4. Janakiraman, K.Sarukesi, Foundations of Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems, Macmillan

Series in Computer Science.

5. W. Patterson, Introduction to Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems”, Prentice Hall of India,

2003.

S.

No.

Test I†

Test II†

Model †

Semester End


Total 100 100 100 100

11E030 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To make the students to understand Continuous time and discrete time signals and systems.

• To analyze the signals and systems using different transforms

• To acquire the basic knowledge of FIR and IIR systems

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course Outcomes


1. Know Basic knowledge on continuous, discrete time Signals & systems

2. Classify systems based on their properties

3. Analyze and manipulate continuous-time and discrete-time signals by different transforms

4. Understand the sampling theorem and how it links continuous -time signals to discrete-time signals

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in Mathematics III.

Assessment Pattern


Unit I

Introduction to Signals and Systems Basic continuous time signals – Basic discrete time signals – Representation of signals in terms of impulses –

Continuous time systems – Discrete time signals – Properties of systems – Linear time invariant systems: discrete

and continuous – Continuous time system representation by differential equation – Discrete time system

representation by difference equation – Block diagram representation.

Properties of system 9 Hours

Unit II Laplace Transform and Z Transform

Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms – Analysis and characterization of LTI system using Laplace transform –

The Z transform and the inverse Z transform – Properties of Z transform – analysis and characterization of LTI

system using Z transform

Properties of Z transform 9 Hours

186

Unit III

Sampling Representation of continuous time signals by samples – Sampling theorem – Reconstruction from samples using interpolation – Effect of undersampling – Aliasing error – Discrete time processing of continuous time signals – Sampling of discrete time systems.

Aliasing error 9 Hours

Unit IV

Fourier analysis of Discrete Time Signals and Systems Representation of periodic signals by discrete time Fourier series – Representation of periodic and aperiodic

signals by discrete time Fourier transforms – Properties of discrete time Fourier transforms – Parsevals’s relation – Convolution property – Response of discrete time systems to complex exponentials frequency response of systems

characterized by difference equations.

Parsevals’s relation

9 Hours

Unit V Fourier analysis of Continuous Time Signals and Systems Fourier series representation of periodic signals – Approximation of periodic signals using Fourier series and convergence of Fourier series – Representation of aperiodic signals – Continuous time Fourier transform – Properties Fourier transform – Response of continuous time systems to complex exponentials – Frequency response of systems characterized by differential equations.

Properties Fourier transform 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. A.V Oppenheim ,A.S Willsky and S.H Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, Pearson Education Asia, 2nd

Edition, New Delhi, 2007.

References 1. Ronald E. Ziemer, William H. Transter and Ronald. D. Fanmin, “Signals and System –

Continuous and Discrete”, Pearson Education Asia, 4th Edition, New Delhi 1998

2. M.J Roberts., “Signals and Systems – Analysis using Transform Method and Matlab”, McGraw

Hill Book Company, New Delhi 2004 3. S. Haykin and Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, John Wiley and Sons,New York 2002

4. B.P Lathi., “Linear Systems and Signals”, Oxford University Press, Oxford 2003

5. Chi Tsong Chen, “Signals and Systems”, Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, Oxford 2004

188

S. No.

Test I† Test II

† Model

† Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20 2 Understand 20 20 20 20 3 Apply 30 30 30 30 4 Analyze/ Evaluate 30 30 30 30 5 Create -- -- -- --

Total 100 100 100 100

11E031 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To understand the Total Quality Management concept and principles and the various tools

available to achieve Total Quality Management.

• To understand the application of statistical approach for quality control.

• To create an awareness about the ISO and QS certification process and its need for the industries.

• To apply the quality concepts in product design, manufacturing etc in order to maximize customer

satisfaction.

Program Outcomes PO9: An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or


Course Outcomes


1. Understanding the management philosophies.

2. Demonstrate the uses of SPC and its application in the shop floor.

3. Knowing the tools available for converting the customer’s need into usable product .

Prerequsite


Assessment Pattern


Unit I

Introduction Definition of Quality – Dimensions of Quality – Quality Planning – Quality costs – Analysis Techniques for Quality Costs – Basic concepts of Total Quality Management – Historical Review – Quality Statements – Strategic Planning, Deming Philosophy – Crosby philosophy – Continuous Process Improvement – Juran Trilogy, PDSA Cycle, 5S, Kaizen – Obstacles to TQM Implementation.

Obstacles to TQM Implementation

Unit II

TQM Principles

9 Hours

Principles of TQM, Leadership – Concepts – Role of Senior Management – Quality Council, Customer satisfaction

– Customer Perception of Quality, Customer Complaints, Service Quality, Customer Retention,

Employee Involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Teams, Recognition and Reward,

Performance Appraisal, Benefits– Supplier Partnership – Partnering, sourcing, Supplier Selection, Supplier Rating,

Relationship Development, Performance Measures – Basic Concepts, Strategy, Performance Measure

Benefits of supplier partnership 9 Hours

Unit III

Statistical Process Control (SPC) The seven tools of quality – Statistical Fundamentals – Measures of central Tendency and Dispersion, Population and Sample, Normal Curve, Control Charts for variables X bar and R chart and attributes P, nP, C, and u charts, Industrial

Examples, Process capability, Concept of six sigma – New seven Management tools

Application ofconcept of six sigma

Unit IV TQM Tools 9 Hours Benchmarking – Reasons to Benchmark – Benchmarking Process, Quality Function Deployment (QFD) –

House of Quality, QFD Process, and Benefits – Taguchi Quality Loss Function – Total Productive

Maintenance (TPM) – Concept, Improvement Needs, and FMEA – Stages of FMEA- Case studies

Benchmarking process

Unit V

190

Quality Systems 9 Hours

Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality Systems – ISO 9000:2000 Quality System – Elements, Implementation of Quality System, Documentation, Quality Auditing, ISO 9000:2005 (definitions), ISO

9001:2008 (requirements) and ISO 9004:2009 (continuous improvement), TS 16949, ISO 14000, AS9100 – Concept,

Requirements and Benefits- Case studies

Concepts and requirements of AS9100 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbook

1. Dale H. Besterfiled, Total Quality Management, Pearson Education Inc, New Delhi, 2003(Revised

Third Edition)

References

1. N. Gupta and B. Valarmathi, Total Quality Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company

Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2009. 2. James R. Evans and William M. Lidsay, The Management and Control of Quality, South-Western

2002.

3. Dr S. Kumar, Total Quality Management, Laxmi Publications Ltd., New Delhi 2006.

4. P. N. Muherjee, Total Quality Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2006. 5. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-roorkee/industrial enginerring/index.htm 6. http://asq.org/services/wh y-quality/case-studies.html

7. http://www.cluteinstitute-onlinejournals.com/PDFs/912.pdf

8. www.informaworld.com/index/776191176.pdf

9. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?courseId=1105

11O0PA NANO SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To impart knowledge on nanoscience and technology.

• To create an awareness on the nanomaterials.

• At the end of the course the students are familiar with nanomaterials and their applications.

Program Outcome



limitations.

Course Outcomes


1. Acquire knowledge of nano sciences to Fabricate products

2. Demonstrate broad knowledge in nanotechnology and a considerable degree of specialized knowledge in one of

its applications;

3. Demonstrate specialised knowledge of nanoscience methods for producing, defining and physically

modelling nanostructured semiconductor material

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in physics and chemistry.

S.No

Test 1∗ Test 2∗

Model ∗

Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20


3 Apply 25 25 25 25

4 Analyze 25 25 25 25

5 Evaluate 10 10 10 10

6 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Assessment Pattern


192

Unit I

Nano Scale Materials Introduction-classification of nanostructures, nanoscale architecture – effects of the nanometer length scale – changes to the system total energy, changes to the system structures– effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties – structural, thermal, chemical, mechanical, magnetic, optical and electronic properties.

Differences between bulk and nanomaterials and their physical properties. 9 Hours

Unit II

Nanomaterials Synthesis Methods Fabrication methods – top down processes – milling, litho graphics, machining process

– bottom-up process – vapor phase deposition methods, plasma-assisted deposition process, colloidal and solgel methods – methods for templating the growth of

nanomaterials – ordering of nanosystems, self-assembl y and self-organization.

Magnetron sputtering process to obtain nanomaterials. 9 Hours

Unit III Nano Characterization Techniques General classification of characterization methods – analytical and imaging techniques – microscop y techniques - electron microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, atomic force microscopy – diffraction techniques – spectroscopy techniques-X-ray spectroscopy.

Electrical properties of nanomaterials. 9 Hours

Unit IV Inorganic Semiconductor Nanostructures

Quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures - quantum wells, quantum wires, quantum dots,

super lattices– fabrication techniques – requirements, epitaxial growth, lithography and etching,

electrostatically induced dots and wires, quantum well width fluctuations, thermally annealed quantum

wells and self-assembly techniques .

Quantum efficiency of semiconductor nanomaterials. 9 Hours

Unit V

Nanodevices And Applications Organic FET- principle, description, requirements, integrated circuits- organic LED’s – basic processes, carrier injection, excitons, optimization - organic photovoltaic cells- carbon nano tubes- structure, synthesis and electronic properties -applications- fuel cells- nano motors -bio nano particles-nano – objects.

Applications of nano materials in biological field. 9 Hours

Textbooks Total:45 Hours

1. Robert W. Kelsall, Ian W. Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John

Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2005.

2. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, McGraw – Hill Education (India) Ltd, 2007.

3. Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology, Kluwer publishers, 2002.

4. B. Wang, Drug Delivery: Principles and Applications,Wiley Interscience 2005.

References 1. Michael Kohler, Wolfgang Fritzsche, Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Nanostructuring

Techniques, Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co.2004.

2. William Goddard, Donald .W.Brenner, Handbook of Nano Science Engineering and Technology,

CRC Press, 2004.

3. Bharat Bhushan, Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology, 2004.

4. Charles P Poole, Frank J Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley and Sons, 2003. 5. Mark Ratner, Daniel Ratner, Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next Big Idea, Prentice

Hall, 2003.

194

S.No

Test 1∗ Test 2∗

Model ∗

Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20


3 Apply 25 25 25 25

4 Analyze 25 25 25 25

5 Evaluate 10 10 10 10

6 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

11O0PB LASER TECHNOLOGY

Objectives

• To impart knowledge on laser principles.

• To create expertise on the applications of laser in various engineering fields.

3 0 0 3.0

• At the end of the course the students are familiar with generation and applications of laser in

various engineering fields.

Program Outcome



limitations.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Demonstrate knowledge of Laser Fundamentals

2. Know about laser materials

3. Understand Laser science

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in basic physics.

Assessment Pattern


Unit I

Laser Fundamentals Introduction - principle - spontaneous emission - stimulated emission - population inversion-Pumping

mechanisms - characteristics. Types of lasers –principle, construction, working, energy level diagram and applications of dye laser – chemical laser – excimer laser.

Laser action. 9 Hours

Unit II Threshold Condition

Einstein coefficients A and B – spontaneous life time – light amplification – principle of laser action – laser oscillations – resonant cavity – modes of a laser.

Conditions involved in laser production. 9 Hours

Unit III

Laser Materials

Activator and host materials for solid lasers - growth techniques for solid laser materials - Bridgman and Stock-Berger technique – advantages and disadvantages - Czochralski and Kyropoulous techniques – merits and demerits.

Techniques of producing laser. 9 Hours

Unit IV

Laser in Science

Introduction – harmonic generation – stimulated raman emission – self focusing – laser and ether drift –

rotation of the earth – photon statistics.

Applications of Laser in ranging. 9 Hours

Unit V

Laser in Industry Introduction – Applications in material processing: laser welding – hole drilling – laser cutting – laser tracking – Lidar – laser in medicine. Applications of Laser in sensors. 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbooks

1. K.Thiyagarajan and A.K.Ghatak, LASER:Theory and applications. Macmillan India Limited, 2000. 2. M. N. Avadhanulu, An Introduction To Lasers Theory And Applications, S. Chand Publisher, 2001.

References 1. K.P.R.Nair, Atoms, Molecules and Lasers, Narosa Publishing House, 2009. 2. K. R. Nambiar ,Lasers: Principles Types And Applications , New Age International Publications, 2006.

3. Alphan Sennaroglu, Solid-State Lasers and Applications, CRC Press, 2006

196

S.No

Test 1∗ Test 2∗

Model ∗

Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20


3 Apply 25 25 25 25

4 Analyze 25 25 25 25

5 Evaluate 10 10 10 10

6 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

11O0PC ELECTRO OPTIC MATERIALS

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To impart knowledge on electro-optic materials.

• To develop fundamental understanding of various electro-optic materials in communication.

Program Outcome





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Understand Basics of lasers 2. Know about non linear optics 3. Know about Electro Optic Devices

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in basic physics

Assessment Pattern


Unit I Basics of Lasers

Introduction – Einstein coefficients – laser beam characteristics – spontaneous and stimulated emission population inversion - light amplification – threshold condition – laser rate equations – two level laser –

three level laser – mode selection – transverse mode – longitudinal mode.

Spatial and temporal coherence. 9 Hours

Unit II

Wave Propagation in Anisotropic Media

Introduction – double refraction – polarization devices - Nicol prism – Glan-Thomson prism – retardation

plates – Soleil Babinet compensator – Plane waves in anisotropic media – wave refractive index - ray

refractive index - ray velocity surface – index ellipsoid.

Optical activity.

9 Hours

Unit III

Electro Optic Effect

Introduction – KDP crystals – longitudinal mode – phase modulation – amplitude modulation – transverse

mode. Acousto-optic effect – small Bragg angle diffraction – large Bragg angle diffraction – codirectional

coupling – contradirectional coupling - applications.

Modulators.

Unit IV

Non Linear Optics Introduction – self focusing phenomenon – second harmonic generation – phase matching – birefringent phase matching – quasi phase matching – frequency mixing. Semiconductors – measurement of third order

optical non-linearities in semiconductors.

Frequency doubling nature of materials.

Unit V

Electro Optic Devices

9 Hours

Introduction – light emitting diode – direct and indirect band gap materials – homo junction – hetero

junction – advantages – disadvantages – applications. Injection laser diode – characteristics – advantages –

disadvantages. Liquid crystal displays – dynamic scattering – field effect – advantages – disadvantages.

Optoelectronic devices.

9 Hours

9 Hours

Total 45 Hours

Textbooks

1. Ajoy Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, Optical electronics, Cambridge University Press, 7th reprint

2006.

2. B. Somanathan Nair, Electronic devices and applications, Prentice - Hall of India private limited, 2010.

3. Frank L. Pedrotti, S. J. Leno S. Pedrotti and Leno M. Pedrotti, Introduction to optics, Pearson

Prentice Hall, 2008.

References

1. Ji - ping Huang and K.M.Yu, New Non Linear Optical Materials, Nova, Science Publishers, 2007.

2. S.C. Gupta, Opto electronic devices and systems, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt. Ltd, 2005

198

S.No.

Test 1∗ Test 2∗

Model ∗

Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20


3 Apply 25 25 25 25

4 Analyze 25 25 25 25

5 Evaluate 10 10 10 10

6 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

11O0PD VACUUM SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To impart a sound knowledge on the vacuum science.

• To develop the necessary background to perform projects involving vacuum and deposition

techniques.

• At the end of the course the students are familiar with the various vacuum deposition technologies

employed in the various engineering fields.

Program Outcome





limitations.

Course Outcomes


1. Demonstrate knowledge of Vaccum systems.

2. Measure the Pressure

3. Know about Leak detection

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in basic physics & instrumentation

Assessment Pattern


Unit I Vacuum Systems Introduction – units of vacuum – kinetic aspects of gases in a vacuum chamber – physical parameters at low pressures – classification of vacuum ranges – gas flow at low pressures – throughput and pumping

speed – flow rate and conductance.

Evacuation rate – out gassing – gas flow – turbulent flow. 9 Hours

Unit II

Production of Vacuum Classification of vacuum pumps – rotary vane pumps – roots blowers – diffusion pumps – molecular drag and turbo-molecular pumps – sorption pumps – gettering and ion pumping – cryopumping measurement of pumping speed.

Noble pumps for inert gases. 9 Hours

Unit III Pressure Measurement

Classification of gauges – mechanical gauges – McLeod gauge – thermal conductivity gauges – Hot cathode ionization gauges – Bayard - Alpert gauge – cold cathode ionization gauges – Penning gauge –

magnetron gauge.

Measurement problems in partial pressure analysis. 9 Hours

Unit IV Vacuum Materials and Leak Detection

Sources of gases and vapours – materials for vacuum system – vacuum seals – vacuum valves – traps and

baffles – leak detection – pressure test – spark-coil test – leak testing using vacuum gauges – halogen leak detector – mass-spectrometric leak detector.

Special design considerations – glass to metal seals – high voltage metal feedthrough. 9 Hours

Unit V

Applications of Vacuum Systems Design considerations – vacuum system for surface analysis – space simulators – vacuum based coating units for thin film deposition – thermal evaporation – sputtering process – chemical vapor deposition - metallurgical applications.

Plasma etching – pulsed vapour deposition – PE chemical vapour deposition. 9 Hours

Total 45 Hours

Textbooks

1. Rao V.V, Ghosh T.B, Chopra K.L, “Vacuum science and technology”, Allied Publishers Limited,

2005.

2. Dorothy M. Hoffman, John H. Thomas, Bawa Singh, “Handbook of Vacuum science and

tehnology”, Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 1997.

References

1.David M. Hata, “Introduction to vacuum technology”, Pearson Printice Hall, 2007.

2.John F. O'Hanlon, “A user’s guide to vacuum technology”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003. 3.Chambers.A, “Modern vacuum physics”, Chapman & Hall, CRC Press, 2005.

200

S.No

Test 1∗ Test 2∗

Model ∗

Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20


3 Apply 25 25 25 25

4 Analyze 25 25 25 25

5 Evaluate 10 10 10 10

6 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

11O0PE SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS AND DEVICES 3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To improve knowledge on semiconducting materials.

• To develop the necessary understanding of semiconducting materials and their applications.

• At the end of the course the students are familiar with various semiconducting materials and their

applications

Program Outcome





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


1. Understand properties of semiconductor materials 2. Know about PN junction basics 3. Know about electronic devices

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in electron devices.

Assessment Pattern


Unit I

Properties of Semiconductor Energy bands – allowed and forbidden energy bands – Kronig Penny model – electrical conductivity in solids based on energy bands - band model – electron effective mass – concept of holes in semiconductor – density of states – extension to semiconductors.

k-space diagram. 9 Hours

Unit II

Carrier Transport Properties Carrier drift – drift current density – mobility effects on carrier density – conductivity in semiconductor –

carrier transport by diffusion – diffusion current density – total current density – breakdown phenomena – avalanche breakdown.

Graded Impurity Distribution. 9 Hours

Unit III

P-N Junction Diode Qualitative description of charge flow in p-n junction – boundary condition – minority carrier distribution – ideal p-n junction current – temperature effects – applications – the turn on transient and turn off transient.

Charge storage and diode Transients. 9 Hours

Unit IV

Bipolar Junction Transistor Introduction to basic principle of operation – the modes of operation – amplification – minority carrier

distribution in forward active mode – non-ideal effects – base with modulation – high injection emitter band gap narrowing – current clouding – breakdown voltage – voltage in open emitter configuration and

open base configuration

Frequency Limitations. 9 Hours

Unit V Opto Electronic Devices

Optical absorption in a semiconductor, photon absorption coefficient – electron hole pair generation - solar

cell – homo junction and hetero junction - Photo transistor – laser diode, the optical cavity, optical

absorption, loss and gain - threshold current.

Photoluminescence and Electroluminescence. 9 Hours

Total 45 Hours Textbooks

1. Donald A Neamen, “Semiconductor physics and devices”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007

2. Albert Malvino,David J Bafes, “Electronic Principles”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007

References 1. M.S. Tyagi, Introduction to Semiconductor materials and devices, John Wiley and sons, 2008. 2. S.M. Sze & K.Ng. Kwok, Physics of semiconductor devices, John Wiley and sons, 2008. 3. M. K. Achuthanand and K.N. Bhat, Fundamentals of semiconductor devices, Tata McGraw Hill,

2007.

202

S.No

Test I

∗

Test II

∗

Model

∗

Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 10 10


3 Apply 30 30 30 30

4 Analyze 20 20 20 20

5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20

6 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

11O0YA POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND PROCESSING


• To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of polymer science, chemistry of

polymers and its processing.

• To make understand the principles and applications of advanced polymer materials.

• Knowledge and application of different polymers and its processing.

Program Outcome PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments,




limitations.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Understand the knowledge of principles of polymer chemistry and mechanism of polymerization

reactions.

2. Acquire knowledge of polymerization techniques.

3. Apply the contextual knowledge of polymer additives and polymer processing in industrial

application.

Prerequsite

Require basic knowledge in basic chemistry

Assessment pattern


Unit I Principles of Polymer Science Polymerization reactions - types – examples - degree of polymerization and average molecular weights. Thermoplastics and thermosetting resins - examples. Electrical - mechanical - thermal properties related to chemical structure. Insulating materials - polymer alloys - composites.

Importance of glass transition temperature. 9 Hours

Unit II

Polymerization Mechanism

Addition polymerization - free radical mechanism - cationic and anionic polymerization - copolymerization

- condensation polymerization –nylon 6,6, ring opening polymerization –nylon 6, coordination

polymerization -. Preparation, properties and industrial applications of polystyrene and bakelite.

Application of industrial polymers. 9 Hours

Unit III

Polymerization Techniques Homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization – bulk polymerization- PMMA,PVC, solution

polymerization - polyacr ylic acid, suspension polymerization-preparation of ion exchange resins, emulsion polymerization-synthetic rubber. Melt solution and interfacial polycondensation. Salient features,

advantages and disadvantages of bulk and emulsion polymerization.

Preparation of biodegradable polymers. 9 Hours

Unit IV

Additives for Polymers Moulding constituents-fillers, plasticizers, lubricants, anti-aging additives, antioxidants, antiozonants, UV

stabilizers, flame retardants, colorants, blow agents, crosslinking agents -functions-significance with suitable examples and applications in industrial processing.

Ecofriendly sustainable additives. 9 Hours

Unit V

Polymer Processing Compression – injection - extrusion and blow mouldings. Film casting - calendering. Thermoforming and

vacuum formed polystyrene, foamed polyurethanes. Fibre spinning - melt, dry and wet spinning. Composite fabrication - hand-layup - filament winding and pultrusion.

Application of fibre reinforced plastics. 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours Textbooks

1. V. R. Gowarikar, N. V. Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar, Polymer Science, New Age

International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.

2. Joel R. Fried, Polymer Science and Technology, Prentice Hall of India (P). Ltd., 2005.

References

1. F. W. Billmeyer, Text Book of Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2007. 2. Barbara H. Stuart, Polymer Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2002.

3. George Odian , Principles of Polymerization, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2004.

4. R. J. Young and P. A. Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, Nelson Thornes Ltd., 2002.

1O0YB ENERGY STORING DEVICES AND FUEL CELLS 3 0 0 3.0

204

Objectives

• To make students understand the concept and working of different types of batteries and to

analyze batteries used in electric vehicles.

• To make students learn about the concept of fuel cells, its types and to relate the factors of energy

and environment.

• Students develop the skill of analyzing various energy storing devices and fuel cells at the end of

the semester.

Program Outcome



limitations.



development.


1. Understand the knowledge of various energy storing devices.

2. Acquire the knowledge to analyze the working of different types of primary and secondary batteries.

3. Apply the knowledge for development of eco friendly energy sources.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in energy storing devices.

Assessment Pattern

S.No

Test I

∗

Test II

∗

Model

Examination∗


1 Remember 20 20 10 10


3 Apply 30 30 30 30

4 Analyze 20 20 20 20

5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20

6 Create - - - -

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Batteries Characteristics - voltage, current, capacity, electricity storage density, power, discharge rate, cycle life,

energy efficiency, shelf life. Primary batteries- zinc-carbon, magnesium, alkaline, manganous dioxide, mercuric oxide, silver oxide batteries-Recycling/Safe disposal of used cells.

Document the various batteries and its characteristics used in mobile phones and lap tops. 9 Hours

Unit II

Batteries for Electric Vehicles

Secondary batteries- Introduction, cell reactions, cell representations and applications- lead acid, nickel-

cadmium and lithium ion batteries - rechargeable zinc alkaline battery. Reserve batteries: Zinc-silver oxide,

lithium anode cell, photogalvanic cells. Battery specifications for cars and automobiles.

206

Development of batteries for satellites. 9 Hours

Unit III Types of Fuel Cells Importance and classification of fuel cells - description, working principle, components, applications and environmental aspects of the following types of fuel cells: alkaline fuel cells, phosphoric acid, solid oxide,

molten carbonate and direct methanol fuel cells.

Fuel cells for space applications. 9 Hours

Unit IV

Hydrogen as a Fuel Sources of hydrogen – production of hydrogen- electrolysis- photocatalytic water splitting – biomass

pyrolysis -gas clean up – methods of hydrogen storage- high pressurized gas -liquid hydrogen type -metal hydride – hydrogen as engine fuel – features, application of hydrogen technologies in the future-

limitations.

Cryogenic fuels. 9 Hours

Unit V

Energy and Environment

Future prospects-renewable energy and efficiency of renewable fuels – economy of hydrogen energy – life

cycle assessment of fuel cell systems. Solar Cells: Energy conversion devices, photovoltaic and photoelectrochemical cells – photobiochemical conversion cell. Bio-fuels from natural resources. 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbooks

1. M. Aulice Scibioh and B. Viswanathan, Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications, University Press, India, 2006.

2. F. Barbir, PEM fuel cells: Theory and practice,Elsevier, Burlington, MA, 2005. 3. M. R. Dell Ronald and A. J. David, Understanding Batteries, Royal Society of Chemistry, 2001.

References

1. M. A. Christopher Brett, Electrochemistry: Principles, Methods and Applications, Oxford University, 2004.

2. J. S. Newman and K. E. Thomas-Alyea, Electrochemical Systems, Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, 2004.

3. G. Hoogers, Fuel Cell Handbook, CRC, Boca Raton, FL, 2003.

4. Lindon David, Handbook of Batteries, McGraw Hill, 2002.

5. H. A. Kiehne , Battery Technology Hand Book,. Expert Verlag , Renningen Malsheim, 2003.

11O0YC CHEMISTRY OF NANOMATERIALS

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of nanochemistry including synthesis.

• To make students understand the principles and applications of nanomaterials.

• Knowledge about the characterization and applications of nanomaterials.

Program Outcome PO4: An ability to use research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments,


S.No

Test I∗ Test II∗

Model ∗

Semester End


Total 100 100 100 100



limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes

On completion of this course, the student will be able to 1. Familiar with fundamentals of nanoscience and technology and acquire the capability of applying them.

2. Acquire comprehensive knowledge in the synthetic methods for the nanoparticles preparation.

3. Get strong foundation in the properties of nanoparticles which give contextual knowledge for their higher research

programmes.

4. Get vital understanding in the characterization of nanoparticles

5. Furnish the knowledge and skills for entry level placement in core industry as well as scientific software concerns.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in basic physics.

Assessment Pattern


Unit I

Nanoworld Introduction – History of nanomaterials – concepts of nanomaterials – size and confinement effects – nanoscience – nanotechnology – Moor’s law. Properties – electronic, optical, magnetic, thermal,

mechanical and electrochemical properties. Nanobiotechnology – molecular motors – optical tweezers.

First industrial revolution to the nano revolution. 9 Hours

Unit II Synthesis of Nanoparticles Introduction – hydrolysis-oxidation - thermolysis – metathesis - solvothermal methods. Sonochemistry:

nanometals - powders of metallic nanoparticles - metallic colloids and alloys - polymer metal composites - metallic oxides - rare earth oxides - mesoporous materials - mixed oxides. Sono electrochemistry -

nanocrystalline materials. Microwave heating - microwave synthesis of nanometallic particles.

Magnetron sputtering process to obtain nanomaterials. 9 Hours

Unit III Types and Functionalization of Nanomaterials

Polymer nanoparticles, micro, meso and nanoporous materials. Organic – inorganic hybrids, zeolites, nanocomposites, self-assembled monolayers, semiconductor quantum dots, nanofibres, supramolecular

nanostructures. functionalization of nanomaterials – stabilization methods. Reactivity of ω-functional

groups on ligand shells.

Implications of nanoscience and nanotechnology on society. 9 Hours

Unit IV Physical and Chemical Characterization

208

Electron microscopes: scanning electron microscope (SEM) – transmission electron microscope (TEM) –

atomic force microscope (AFM): working principle – instrumentation – applications. UV-visible spectroscopy: principle – instrumentation (block diagram only) – applications. FT-IR spectroscopy: introduction – instrumentation (block diagram only) – applications –merits and demerits.

Nanoscience and technology research institution. 9 Hours

Unit V

Applications of Nanomaterials Nanocatalysis, colorants and pigments, self-cleaning – lotus effect, anti-reflective coatings, antibacterial coatings, photocatalysis, nanofilters for air and water purifiers. Thermal insulation – aerogels, smart sunglasses and transparent conducting oxides – molecular sieves – nanosponges.

Harnessing nanotechnology for economic and social development. 9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbooks

1. C N R Rao, Nanoworld – An Introduction to Nanoscience and Technology, Jawaharlal Nehru

centre for advanced scientific research, Bangalore, India, 2010.

2. C N R Rao, A Muller and A K Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties

and Applications, Vol. 1 & 2, John-Wiley and Sons, 2005.

3. T Pradeep, Nano: The Essentials, Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, 1st Edn., Tata

Mcgraw Hill publishing company, 2007.

References

1. Geoffrey A Ozin, André C Arsenault , Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nanomaterials,

Royal Society of Chemistry, 2009.

2. G B Sergeev, Nanochemistry, 1st Edn.,Elsevier, 2006.

3. S Chen, Functional Nanomaterials: A Chemistry and Engineering Perspective (Nanostructure

Science And Technology), Springer,2010.

4. Yury Gogotsi, Nanomaterials Handbook, Taylor and Francis group, USA, 2006.

11O0YD CORROSION SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

• To impart knowledge about the various types of corrosion and its mechanism.

• To make students understand the various methods of corrosion control, corrosion testing and

monitoring.

• Students acquire the basic knowledge about corrosion and its control.

Program Outcome





limitations.



development.

S.No

Test I∗ Test II∗

Model ∗

Semester End


Total 100 100 100 100

Course Outcomes


1. Familiar with fundamentals of corrosion science and technology and acquire the capability of applying them.

2. Get dynamic understanding in the types of corrosion and role of chemistry behind the corrosion.

3. Demonstrate their ability to identify, formulate and solve corrosion based problems.

4. Have strong foundations in the designing of engineering products with corrosion protective mode.

5. Have strong foundations in the analytical part of corrosion science which give contextual knowledge to their higher

research programmes.

Prerequsite

• Require basic knowledge in environmental science.

Assessment Pattern

Examination

Examination

210

Unit I

Introduction to Corrosion Importance and cost of corrosion – spontaneity of corrosion – passivation - importance of corrosion prevention in various industries - the direct and indirect loss of corrosion- galvanic corrosion: area

relationship in both active and passive states of metals - Pilling Bed worth ratio and its consequences - units

of corrosion rate - mdd and mpy - importance of pitting factor - Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and their advantages and disadvantages

Corrosion of metals by other gases.

Unit II

Forms of Corrosion

9 Hours

Different forms of corrosion - uniform corrosion-galvanic corrosion, crevice corrosion, pitting corrosion, intergranular

corrosion, selective leaching, erosion corrosion, stress corrosion- high temperature oxidation, kinetics of protective film

formation and catastrophic oxidation corrosion. Industrial boiler corrosion, cathodic and anodic inhibitors

Unit III

9 Hours

Mechanisms of Corrosion

Hydrogen embrittlement- cracking, corrosion fatigue - filliform corrosion, fretting damage and microbes induced corrosion. Mechanisms of various corrosion scale formation - thick layer and thin layer - insitu

corrosion scale analysis.

Analyze the rust formation in mild steel using weight loss method 9 Hours

Unit IV

Cathodic and Anodic Protection Engineering Fundamentals of cathodic protection - types of cathodic protection systems and anodes. Life time calculations - rectifier selection. Stray current corrosion problems and its prevention. Coating for various

cathodic protection system and their assessment- inhibitors - corrosion of steels. Anodic protection-Design

for corrosion control.

Role of paints and pigments to protect the corrosive environment

Unit V

Corrosion Testing and Monitoring

9 Hours

Corrosion testing and monitoring - electrochemical methods of polarization- Tafel extrapolation

polarization, linear polarization, impedance techniques-Weight loss method - susceptibility test – testing for

intergranular susceptibility and stress corrosion.

Analyze the instruments for monitoring the corrosion.

9 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Textbooks


† Model

† Semester End

1 Remember 20 20 20 20 2 Understand 20 20 20 20 3 Apply 20 20 20 20 4 Analyze 10 10 10 10 5 Evaluate 20 20 20 20 6 Create 10 10 10 10

Total 100 100 100 100

1. Zaki Ahmad, Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion Control, Elsevier Science and

Technology Books, 2006.

2. R. Winstone Revie and Herbert H. Uhlig, Corrosion and Corrosion Control: An Introduction to Corrosion Science and Engineering, John Wiley & Science, 2008.

3. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2008.

References

1. ASM Hand Book, Vol. 13, Corrosion, ASM International, 2005. 2. Pierre R. Roberge, Hand Book of Corrosion Engineering, McGraw Hill, New York, 2000. 3. Denny A. Jones, Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Prentice Hall Inc., 2004.

4. A.W. Peabody, Control of Pipeline Corrosion, NACE International, Houston, 2001.

11O001 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT I

3 0 0 3.0

Objective • To gain knowledge on basics of Entrepreneurship

• To gain knowledge of business entity, source of capital and financially evaluate the project

• To gain knowledge on production and manufacturing system.



Course Outcomes


1. Entrepreneurial thinking and innovate techniques in developing business

2. Legal aspects of a business

3. Skills on finance and planning operations

Prerequsite


Assessment Pattern


Unit I

Basics of Entrepreneurship

Entrepreneurship Competence, Entrepreneurship as a career, Intrapreneurship, Social entrepreneurship,

Serial entrepreneurship (Cases), Technopreneurship. Entrepreneurial Motivation

Unit II

Generation of Ideas

212

6 Hours

Creativity and Innovation (Cases), Lateral thinking, Generation of alternatives (Cases), Fractionation,

Reversal Method, Brain storming

Utilization of Patent Databases

Unit III

Legal Aspects of Business

8 Hours

Contract Act, Sale of Goods Act, Negotiable Instruments – Promissory Note, Bills and Cheques,

Partnership, Limited Liability Partnership (LLP), Companies Act – Kinds, Formation, Memorandum of

Association, Articles of Association (Cases).

Business Plan Writing 10 Hours

Unit IV Business Finance

Project evaluation and investment criteria (Cases), Sources of finance, Financial statements, Break even

analysis, Cash flow analysis.

Calculation of Return on Investment

Unit V

Operations Management

11 Hours

Importance – Functions –Deciding on the production system – Facility decisions: Plant location, Plant

Layout (Cases), Capacity requirement planning – Inventory management (Cases) – Lean manufacturing. Project Planning

Textbook

10 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

1. Donald F. kuratko, Entrepreneurship – Theory, Process & Practice, South western cengage

learnng, USA, 2009.

References

1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2005.

2. Prasanna Chandra, Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Reviews, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2000.

3. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

4. Norman Gaither and Greg Frazier, Operations Management, Thomson Learning Inc, 2007.

5. Edward De Bono, Lateral Thinking, Penguin Books, 1990.

6. http://www.enterweb.org

7. http://www.internationalentrepreneurship.com/asia_entrepreneur/India_entrepreneur.asp

8. http://indiakellogg.wordpress.com

11O002 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT II 3 0 0 3.0

Objectives

The students on completion of the course will be able to

• Evolve the marketing mix for promoting the product / services

• Handle the human resources and taxation

• Understand Government industrial policies / support provided and prepare a business plan.



Course Outcomes


1. Entrepreneurial thinking and Innovate techniques in developing business

2. Legal aspects of a business

3. Skills on finance and planning operations

Prerequsite


Assessment Pattern


† Model

Examination†

Semester End



3 Apply 20 20 20 20

4 Analyze 10 10 10 10

5 Evaluate 10 10 10 10

6 Create -- -- 05 05

Total 100 100 100 100

Unit I

Marketing Management

Formulating Marketing strategies, The marketing plan, Deciding on the marketing mix (Cases), Interactive

marketing, Marketing through social networks, Below the line marketing, International marketing - Modes

of Entry, Strategies (Cases).

Five P's of marketing, SSI Policy Statement

Unit II

Human Resource Management

10 Hours

Human Resource Planning (Cases), Recruitment, Selection, Training and Development, HRIS, Factories

Act 1948 (an over view)Global Trends in Human Resource Management

214

Unit III

10 Hours

Business Taxation

Direct taxation – Income tax, Corporate tax, MAT, Tax holidays, Wealth tax, Professional tax (Cases).

Indirect taxation – Excise duty, Customs, Sales and Service tax, VAT, Octroi, GST(Cases)

Recent Trends for a Troubled Tax, professional tax slab

Unit IV

Government Support

8 Hours

Industrial policy of Central and State Government, National Institute and Agencies, State Level

Institutions, Financial Institution

Global Entrepreneurship Monitor, Excise Exemption Scheme

Unit V

Business Plan Preparation

7 Hours

Purpose of writing a business plan, Capital outlay, Technical feasibility, Production plan, HR plan, Market

survey and Marketing plan, Financial plan and Viability, Government approvals, SWOT analysis.

Small Industry Cluster Development Programme, National Equity Fund Scheme

Textbook

1. S. S. Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S. Chand & Co, New Delhi, 2010

10 Hours

Total: 45 Hours

Reference(s)

1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.

2. Philip Kotler, Marketing Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003.

3. K. Aswathappa, Human Resource and Personnel Management – Text and Cases, Tata McGraw

Hill,

2007.

4. P. C. Jain, Handbook for New Entrepreneurs, EDII, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2002.

5. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.

6. http://niesbud.nic.in/agencies.htm

7. http://www.planware.org/businessplan.htm

8. http://www.nenonline.org

9. www.forbes.com/managing/

Objectives

11E0XA ELECTRO MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

- - - 1.0

• To study the basics of Electro Magnetic Interference and Compatibility

• To study the EMC standards and regulations





limitations.

Course Outcomes


• Introduces electromagnetic compatibility principles and techniques to the students.

• Electromagnetic coupling and the guidelines for designing electromagnetically compatible systems compliant

with the national and international standards.

Basic principles of RE, CE, RS and CS measurements, EMI measuring instruments- Antennas, LISN, Feed

through capacitor, current probe, EMC analyzer and detection technique open area site, shielded anechoic

chamber, TEM cell, Antennas, Conductors Sensors /Injectors/Couplers, Military Test Method and

Procedures, Calibration Procedures.National and Intentional standardizing organizations- FCC, CISPR,

ANSI, DOD, IEC, CENEEC, FCC CE and RE standards, CISPR, CE and RE Standards, IEC/EN, CS

standards, Frequency assignment - spectrum conversation.

ReferencesTotal: 15 Hours

1. V.Prasad Kodali, Engineering Electromagnetic Compatibility: Principles, Measurements,

Technologies and Computer Models”, New York, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2001.

2. Henry W. Ott, Electromagnetic Compatibility Engineering, New Jersey, John Wiley & Sons,

2009.

3. David A. Weston, Electromagnetic Compatibility- Principles and Applications, New York, Marcel Dekkar Inc., 2001.

4. Clayton R. Paul, Introduction to Electromagnetic Compatibility, New Jersey, John Wiley-

Interscience Inc., 2006.

5. Dipak L. Sengupta and Valdis V. Liepa . Applied Electromagnetics and Electromagnetic

Compatibility, New Jersey, John Wiley-Interscience Inc., 2006.

216

11E0XB EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS - - - 1.0

Objective

• To equip the students with basic knowledge on embedded system

• To train the student with software used for embedded controller





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes


• Get knowledge of microprocessor systems and embedded controllers including the hardware building blocks.

• Ability to build and program an embedded microcontrollers

• Ability to use coomon test equipment

Introduction of embedded system – 8051 architecture - Instructions – Assembly and c language – Port

Programming – Interrupts – Timer / Counter – Serial Communication. ADC – DAC – PWM – DC Motor

Control – Introduction of keil Software – Programming Examples using Keil. Introduction - PIC

microcontroller architecture (16F877) - Instruction set - CCP operation - I2C Implementation – ADC.

Total: 15 Hours

References

1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinlay, The 8051

Microcontroller and Embedded Systems- Using Assembly and C, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of

India, 2006.

2. Lucio Di Jasio, Programming 16-Bit PIC Microcontrollers in C, Boston, Elsevier-Newnes

Publishers, 2007.

3. Chuck Hellebuyck, Beginner's Guide to Embedded C Programming - Volume 2: Timers, Interrupts, Communication, Displays and More, USA, Electronic Products Inc., 2009.

4. Barry B. Brey, Applying PIC18 Microcontrollers: Architecture, Programming, and Interfacing

using C and Assembly, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.

5. Qing Li and Caroline Yao, Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems, San Francisco, CMP

Books, 2003.

6. Raj Kamal, Embedded Systems: Architecture, Programming and Design, New Delhi, McGraw-

Hill, 2009.

7. Jean J. Labrosse., MicroC/OS-II: The Real Time Kernel , Kansas, CMP Books, 2002.

11E0XC REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To equip the students with basic knowledge on RTOS

• To know the basic concepts of ARM processor

Program Outcomes

PO9: An ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or


Course Outcomes

• To meet the basics of real-time systems and to give the knowledge and skills necessary to design and develop

embedded applications by means of real-time operating systems.

RTOS - Introduction to RTOS - Task control block - Real time concepts.

Introduction ARM architecture - Instruction set of LPC 2148 - ARM LPC 2148. Implement I2C in LPC

2148 processor - task using UCOS-II - semaphore using POWER Pac RTOS.

References

Total: 15 Hours

1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinlay, The 8051

Microcontroller and Embedded Systems- Using Assembly and C, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of

India, 2006.

2. Lucio Di Jasio, Programming 16-Bit PIC Microcontrollers in C, Boston, Elsevier-Newnes

Publishers, 2007.

3. Chuck Hellebuyck, Beginner's Guide to Embedded C Programming - Volume 2: Timers,

Interrupts, Communication, Displays and More, USA, Electronic Products Inc., 2009.

4. Barry B. Brey, Applying PIC18 Microcontrollers: Architecture, Programming, and Interfacing

using C and Assembly, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.

5. Qing Li and Caroline Yao, Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems, San Francisco, CMP Books, 2003.

6. Raj Kamal, Embedded Systems: Architecture, Programming and Design, New Delhi, McGraw-

Hill, 2009.

7. Jean J. Labrosse., MicroC/OS-II: The Real Time Kernel , Kansas, CMP Books, 2002.

218

11E0XD MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Objectives

• At the end of this course the student will be able to integrate the knowledge of semiconductors and

solid mechanics to fabricate MEMS devices.

• To identify and understand the various sensors and actutators

Program Outcomes

- - - 1.0





development.

Course Outcomes

• the techniques for building microdevices in silicon, polymer, metal and other materials.

• new applications and directions of modern engineering. Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS – Energy Domains and Transducers- Sensors and Actuators –

Introduction to Microfabrication - Silicon based MEMS processes – New Materials – Review of Electrical

and Mechanical concepts in MEMS – Semiconductor devices – Stress and strain analysis – Flexural beam

bending- Torsional deflection - Electrostatic sensors – Parallel plate capacitors – Applications –

Interdigitated Finger capacitor – Comb drive devices – Thermal Sensing and Actuation – Thermal

expansion – Thermal couples – Thermal resistors – applications – Magnetic Actuators – Micromagnetic

components – Case studies of MEMS in magnetic actuators.

Total: 15 Hours

References

1. Chang Liu, ‘Foundations of MEMS’, Pearson Education Inc., 2006.

2. James J.Allen, micro electro mechanical system design, CRC Press published in 2005 3. Nadim Maluf, “ An introduction to Micro electro mechanical system design”, Artech House, 2000. 4. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, “ The MEMS Handbook”, CRC press Baco Raton, 2000 5. Tai Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Micro systems Design and Manufacture” Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2002.

6. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay k. varadan, Osama O.Awadelkarim,micro sensors mems and smart devices,

John Wiley & son LTD,2002

11E0XE NANO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

Objectives - - - 1.0

• To understand the rudiments of nanofabrication techniques.

• To study about different materials used for MEMS





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes

• Familiarize with the fundamentals and applications of micro/nano systems

• Device design using nano fabrication techniques

Nano Electro Mechanical Systems (NEMS): Nano electro mechanical systems fabrication and process

techniques, lntegration of nanosystems and devices, measurement techniques-applications and future

challenges- Nanochannels, nanowires, and other nanostructures -Materials Aspects of

Nanoelectromechanical Systems,- stress in thin films, mechanical to electrical transduction, surface

engineering techniques, process flow, NEMS actuators, high aspect ratio system technology.

Total: 15 Hours

References

1. W.R.Fahrner, “Nanotechnologv and Nanoelectronics - Materials, Devices and Measurement

Techniques” Springer, 2006.

2. K.Goser, P.Glosekotter & J.Dienstuhl, “Nanoelectronic and Nanosystems – From Transistors to

Molecular QuantumDevices” Springer, 2004

3. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, Nano- and Micro-Electromechanical Systems: Fundamentals of Nano- and

Microengineering, 2005

4. Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next Big Idea, Mark ratner,Daniel Rattner,

ISBN-10:0-13- 101400-5

5. Nanotechnology :Principals &practices, Sulbha K.Kulkarni,Capital publishing company,

6. Sergey Edward Lyshevski, Nano- and Micro-Electromechanical Systems: Fundamentals of Nano- and

Microengineering, 2005

220

11E0XF PROTOCOL DEVELOPMENT - - - 1.0

Objectives

• At the end of this course the student will be able to integrate the knowledge of protocol

compilerand framewotks

• To identify and understand the various ptrotcols





limitations.

Course Outcomes

• Understand the necessary components of a protocol

• Identify the relevant methodological and practical issues of the protocol

Network Protocols, Existing solutions, Protocol layering, Protocol frameworks, Protocol languages,

The Austin Protocol Compiler, The Timed Abstract Protocol Nota., Messages and channels, Processes,

Actions, Protocol style, Justification, Details of TAP, Messa

References

1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “TCP/IP Protocol Suit”, TMH, 2000.

Total: 15 Hours 2. C.E.Perkins, B.Woolf and S.R.Alpert, “Mobile IP, Design Principles and Practices,” Addision

Wesley, 1997

3. Black U, “Computer Networks-Protocols, Standards and Interfaces”, PHI, 1996.

4. Mani Subramanian, “Network Management−Principles and Practices”, Addison Wesley, 2000.

5. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security”, PHI, 2000.

11E0XG WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS - - - 1.0

Objectives

• To gain a thorough introduction to the area of wireless sensor networks

• To understand about networking sensors and routing.

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course Outcomes

• knowledge of wireless sensor networks to various application areas.

• Design, implement and maintain wireless sensor networks.

• Formulate and solve problems creatively.

Single-Node Architecture - Hardware Components, Energy Consumption of Sensor Nodes , Operating

Systems and Execution Environments, Network Architecture - Sensor Network Scenarios, Optimization

Goals and Figures of Merit, Gateway Concepts - Networking sensors: physical Layer and Transceiver

Design Considerations, MAC Protocols for Wireless Sensor Networks, Low Duty Cycle Protocols And

Wakeup Concepts - S-MAC , The Mediation Device Protocol, Wakeup Radio Concepts, Address and

Name Management, Assignment of MAC Addresses, Routing Protocols- Energy-Efficient Routing,

Geographic Routing.

References

1. Holger Karl & Andreas Willig, " Protocols And Architectures for Wireless Sensor

Networks" , John Wiley, 2005.

2. Feng Zhao & Leonidas J. Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks- An Information

Processing Approach", Elsevier, 2007.

3. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, & Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks- Technology, Protocols, And

Applications”, John Wiley, 2007.

4. Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003.

Total: 15 Hour

222

Objectives

11E0XH VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - - - 1.0

• To Understand the different methods of controlling a VFD

• To Recognize the main components of a VFD system

Program Outcomes





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes

• Knowledge of Methods for starting an AC motor • Functionalities and applications of VSD

• Electrical environment of VSD

Power semiconductor devices for variable frequency drives- Electrical machines for drives- induction

motors- synchronous permanent magnet motors- power electronic converters for drives- power electronic

converters for control of amplitude- power electronic converters for ac variable frequency Drives-pulse

width modulation for electronic power converters- open loop schemes- closed loop PWM control- High

power industrial drives.

Total: 15 Hours

References

1. Robert Gluszik, Alex Harvey , “Variable Frequency Drives: A Guideline for an Introduction to

Variable Frequency Drives - VFD”, Hydraulic Institute, Incorporated, 2009

2. Bimal K. Bose,” Power electronics and variable frequency drives: technology and applications”,

IEEE Press, 1997

3. David Finney,” Variable frequency AC motor drive systems”, IET, 1988

11EOXI PHOTOVOLTAIC SOLAR SYSTEM

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To understand the solar power plant

• To study the panel and battery




including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.

Course Outcomes


• Understand the equipments present in solar power plant

• Understand the panel design

Introduction of Solar Power Plant – Detailed View on Equipments of Solar Power Plant (Transformer,

Cable, Switch Gears, etc) – Working Principle of Solar Power Plant – Electrical Load List Preparation – Introduction on P.V

Panel & Battery.

Calculation for find the number of panel required for given load – Battery Selection Procedure - Detailed Introduction

of Installation – Maintenance of Panel & Battery – Site selection – Documentation Details – Introduction on Lighting,

Earthing, Surge Arrester, and Inverter Selection.

Hands on Sizing & Selection of P.V Panel – Battery & Inverter Selection

Total: 15 Hours

11E0XJ SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR – INDUSTRIAL PRACTICES

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To understand the practical aspects of generator testing

• To study testing of generator





Course Outcomes


• Identify different testing of generator

• Select the technical standards and grid codes

1. Introduction to practical aspects of generator testing, Distinction between factory and field tests, Details of electrical tests

(test procedure & analysis of results):

a. Off-Line Tests:

i) Tests on Stator: Insulation Resistance (Polarization Index), Winding Resistance, Core hot-spots, Capacitance & tan-delta,

Partial discharge, High voltage, Winding & core temperature detectors.

ii) Tests on Field: Insulation Resistance, Winding resistance, Winding impedance, Field short circuit & ground detectors, High

voltage, Pole drop test, Magnetization.

b. On-Line Tests

i) Generator Open-circuit & Short-circuit Characteristics

ii) Step tests for excitation system

iii) Separation tests

c. Factory acceptance tests 10 Hours.

2. Lab work 4 Hours.

3. Introduction to Indian Grid Code

224

a. Power Scenario in India

b. Technical standards and Grid codes for generator stations. 2 Hours.

11E0XK PRACTICAL ASPECTS OF VAR CONTROL AND ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To understand the necessity of effective storage devices.

• To be able to design an appropriate FACTS Controllers.





Course Outcomes


• Identify the suitable reactive power control

• Understand energy storage devices

Introduction to the problem of VAR control-Practical aspects of reactive power problem: Voltage stability, Static &

Dynamic VAR requirements, Torsional modes and Sub-synchronous resonance-Sources of reactive power: Capacitor &

Reactor, Transformer, Synchronous condenser, Excitation system-Static excitation system, Functionality ,Technical features

,IEEE standards, Generator capability, Under excitation and over excitation limiters-Power system stabilizer (PSS):Function

,Design ,IEEE standard models for PSS-Introduction to Energy Storage (ES) devices: Need for ES, Types & application of ES

devices.

Total: 20 Hours

References

The course materials will be provided by the industry.

11E0XL SOLAR POWER PLANT DESIGN

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To understand the basics of solar energy & PV system

• To design the PV panel





Course Outcomes


• Understand the working of solar power plant

• Design PV panel and battery

Session -1 Time: 06 Hrs

Introduction about Solar Energy – History of Photovoltaic System - PV Module (Solar Cell) – Types of PV Module –

Manufacturing of PV Module – Testing of P.V Module - Working Principle of PV Cell – Overview of Solar Power Plant -

Working Principle of Solar Power Plant – Grid Tie System – Stand Alone System – India at 2030 – Selection of P.V Module -

Inverter – Selection of Inverter – Battery – Selection of Battery – Cable – Selection of Cable - Charger Controller Unit –

MPPT – Junction Box.


Load List Preparation – Design Sizing & Calculation on PV Panels - Series & Parallel Connection – Site selection -

Detailed Introduction on Installation – Installation Techniques – Maintenance of PV Panel & Battery – Importance of

Maintenance - Application of photovoltaic system – Advantages & Disadvantages of photovoltaic system.


Hands on Practice in following Items. Sizing & Calculation on PV Panels to find the Number Panels Required for

given load. Design & Selection of Battery. Selection of Inverter Selection.

Reference Materials

1. Basic Electric Circuit Theory, a One-semester Text, third edition By I. D. Mayergoyz 2. Advanced Photovoltaic System Design, Third Edition by John Balfour, Michael Shaw 3. Photovoltaic Design and Installation for Dummies by Ryan Mayfield

4. Photovoltaic: Design and Installation Manual by Solar Energy International 5. Solar Photovoltaic: Fundamentals, Technologies and Applications by Solanki Chetan Singh

11E0XM SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To understand the role of smart grids.

• To be able to design smart grid using Labview





Course Outcomes


• Understand the role of smart grids and measuring instruments

• Identify integration technology for DG

• Role of DG in smartgrid

• Smart meters and Instruments

• Communication protocol for smartgrid

226

• PMU and challenges

• Integration technology for DG

• Labview applications in smartgrid

• Applications of nanotechnology in power systems

• Hands on experience with Labview, DCS and SCADA system, Smart grid lab, etc.

Total: 20 Hours

11E0XN POWER PLANT ENGINEERING – STUDY & DESIGN

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To understand the LV cable and its testing

• To study the transformer sizing and its selection





limitations.



Course Outcomes


• Identify the LV cable and its testing

• study the transformer sizing and its selection

UNIT – 1 Time: 10 Hrs

L.V CABLE SIZING & L.V CABLE SELECTION

Introduction – Construction of Cable – Insulation – Characteristics of Insulation – Conductor (Skin Effect) – Advantages of

PVC / XLPE / EPR Cable – Fire resistance cable – Flame Retardant Cable – Types of Test – Selection of Cable for Zone -0,

Zone -1 & Zone – 2 – Identification of length in Layout – Load List Preparation (L.V) – Study of Datasheet – Review of

Manufacturer – Study of Current Carrying & Voltage drop – L.V Cable Sizing for Incomer and Outgoing feeder - Causes of

Overloading – Protection of Cable – Determination of Permissible Length – Installation of Cable – Procedures to handle the

cable – IEC – 60502 – Part – 1.

UNIT – 2 Time: 10 Hrs

TRANSFORMER SIZING & SELECTION TRANSFORMER

Introduction – Construction of Transformer – Types of Transformer - Power Transformer – Lighting Transformer – Welding

Transformer – Conductor & Core – Calculation of Inrush Current – Overview of Cooling Techniques - Load List Preparation -

Identification of total demand – Sizing of Power Transformer & Sizing of Lighting Transformer – Short Circuit Calculation of

transformer - Causes of Overloading – Protection of Transformer – Testing of Transformer - Advantages of Star / Delta –

Disadvantages of Delta / Delta - Transformer – Why Lighting Transformer? – Selection of Transformer – About IEC – 60076.

11E0XO WIND ENERGY CONVERSION SYSTEM

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To understand components of WECS

• To study the types of generator for WECS

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course Outcomes


• Identify the components of WECS

• Select the suitable generator for WECS

Introduction Time: 10Hrs

Introduction–Equipment of Wind Power Plant (Transformer, Cable, Switch Gears, Junction Box etc) – Working Principle of

Wind Power Plant –Introduction of Generators, cable, Transformer, Yaw, Anemometer, Wind Vane, Lightning arrestor,

Earthing, Converter etc - Introduction on Yaw Mechanism & Pitch Control – Grid Connected and Isolated WTGs – On

Shore & Off Shore Wind farms

Type of Generator and impact on Grid Time: 10Hrs

Types–Type A, B, C & D – Squirrel Cage Induction Generator – Slip Ring Induction Generator – Doubly Fed Induction

Generator – Synchronous generator with full converter – Comparison of various generators - Impact of Wind on Grid- Site

selection – Power Evacuation

11E0XP POWER QUALITY

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To understand the different power quality issues

• To study the filter design

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course Outcomes

228


• Recognize the different power quality issues

• Select the suitable power compensating devices


Introduction–Sag, Swell, Under Voltage, Over Voltage – Harmonic – Flickers – Causes - Displacement Power factor –

Distortion power factor – Power factor correction.

Harmonic Studies Time: 10Hrs

THD Calculation – Voltage and Current distortion – Telephonic influence factor – Filter Design Passive filter Design – Single

Tuned Filter – Detuned Filter – Active Filters – Dynamic Voltage Restorer – Unified Power Quality Conditioner –

DSTATCOM.

11E0XQ DISTRIBUTED GENERATION AND ITS IMPACTS

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To understand the renewable energy systems

• To study the Impact of Distributed Generation

Program Outcomes





limitations.



Course Outcomes


• Compare the renewable energy systems

• Identify the Impact of Distributed Generation


Solar – Biomass – Small Hydro – Wind Generation – Generation Technology – Environmental impact – Cost benefits –

Optimal location of Distributed Generation

Impact of Distributed Generation Time: 10Hrs

Impact of Distributed Generation on Voltage profile – Equipment Loading – Losses – Short Circuit Level – Stability –

Protection and Relay Coordination – Harmonic and Power Quality

11E0XR POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION AND RELAY COORDINATION

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To understand the different protection schemes





limitations.

Course Outcomes


• Identify the suitable protection scheme

• Compare different relays


Basics of Protection – Over Current and Earth fault protection – Demerits of OC & EF – Distance and Differential Protection –

Protection of Transformer – Generators – Motors – Capacitor Banks – Cables and Over head transmission lines

Relay Coordination Time: 10Hrs

Plug setting calculation – TMS Selection and Operating time of the relay – Close in fault – Through Fault Current – IDMT &

Instantaneous relays – Need for directional relays – Over Voltage and Under voltage relays – Over frequency and Under

frequency relays – Rate of Change of frequency relays

11E0XS POWER SYSTEM PLANNING

- - - 1.0

Objectives

• To understand the load forecating

• To study the transmission planning

Program Outcomes





limitations.

Course Outcomes

230


• Identify the load forecasting techniques

• Analyze the problem in transmission system.

Load Forecast Time: 10Hrs

Objectives of forecasting - Load growth patterns and their importance in planning - Load forecasting Based on discounted

multiple regression technique-Weather sensitive load forecasting-Determination of annual forecasting-Use of AI in load

forecasting

Transmission Planning Time: 10Hrs

Basic concepts on expansion planning-procedure followed for integrate transmission system planning, current practice in

India-Capacitor placement problem in transmission system and radial distributions system.

11E0RA POWER CONVERTERS FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY APPLICATIONS - - - 3.0

Objectives

• To study about the modern power converters for renewable energy power harnessing.

• To study about the interfacing of power converters with grids.





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes

• Knowledge of components of a renewable energy systems and their nintegration to form a flexible reliable power

supply system including energy storage systems.

• solutions to the grid intergration challenges

Cuk, Luo, Single-Ended Primary-Inductor Converter (SEPIC) & Zeta converters for Photo Voltaic Systems. Types

– Comparison – Multi Level Inverter for PV system –Multi Level Inverter for Wind Energy Conversion Systems –

Fast Fourier Transform analysis for different levels. Choppers and Rectifiers for Wind Energy Conversion Systems – Fast

Fourier Transform Analysis - Types of generator for WECS- Efficiency – Comparison. Different types of PWM inverters-

optimization technique- Genetic Algorithm, ANT Colony Optimization and Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO)

Techniques. Types of DPS, Converters for DPS, MLI for DPS

References

1. Anbukumar kavitha and Govindarajan Uma, Experimental Verification of Hopf Bifurcation in DC-DC Luo Converter, Vol.23, No.6, IEEE Transaction on Power Electronics, 2008, pp 2878-

2883.

2. Sergio Busquets Monge, Joan Rocabert and Peter Rodriguez, “Multilevel Diode-Clamped Converter

for Photovoltaic Generators with Independent Voltage Control for each Solar Array”, Vol.55 No.7, IEEE

Transactions on Industrial Electronics, July2008, pp.2713-2723.

3. B.R. Lin and J.J. Chen, Analysis of An Integrated Fly Back and Zeta Converter with Active

Clamping Technique, Vol.2, IET Power Electronics, 2009, pp.355-363.

4. A. Mustafa, Al-Saffar, Esam H.Ismail, Ahmad J.Sabzali and Abbas A.Fardoun, An Improved Topology of SEPIC Converter with Reduced Output Voltage Ripple, Vol.23, No.5, IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, September 2008, pp 2377-2386.

5. Ki-Bum Park, Chong-Eun Kim, Gun-Woo Moon and Myung-Jooong Youn, A Double-Ended ZVS

Half-Bridge Zeta Converter, Vol.23, No.26, IEEE Transactions on Power Electronics, November

2008, pp 2838-2846.

232

1E0RB EMERGING TRENDS IN POWER CONVERSION TECHNOLOGY

- - - 3.0

Objectives

• To study the various switching techniques to reduce the harmonics on output of power converters.

• To study the recent advancements in power converters.

Program Outcomes





limitations.



development.

Course Outcomes

• Appreciation of recent history and current trends in the energy field. • Ability to make a critical evaluation of developments in energy conservation technology.

Gating signals – PWM techniques – Types – SPWM, SVPWM and SVM – choice of carrier frequency in

SPWM – switch realization – switching losses – efficiency Vs switching frequency – applications – EMI

and EMC considerations. Basic of DC – DC converter – hard and soft switching concepts – digital

switching techniques - Luo converter - principle of operation – voltage lift techniques - MPPT algorithms

– sliding mode control - applications – photovoltaic systems – hybrid vehicles. Multilevel concept –

Diode clamped – Flying capacitor – Cascade type multilevel inverters – Hybrid multi level inverter- FFT

analysis- Comparison of multilevel inverters - Applications of multilevel inverter - Principle of operation of

impedance source inverter- Shoot thro zero state – Application – UPS – Adjustable speed drives. Single

phase and three phase – direct indirect – sparse and very sparse – multilevel matrix converter – Z source

matrix converter – applications – wind mills – Adjustable speed drives industrial applications - Hybrid

vehicles. Effects of harmonics – harmonics eliminations – selective harmonic elimination – selective sine

PWM carrier elimination – Power Factor controlling – active power factor controlling – hysteresis control –

voltage feed back control - current feed back control.

References

1. Ned Mohan, Undeland and Robbin, Power Electronics: Converters, Application and Design, New

York, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.

2. Kolar, J.W. Schafmeister, F. Round, S.D. Ertl, H. ETH Zurich and Zurich, Novel Three-Phase

AC–AC Sparse Matrix Converters, Vol.22, No.5, IEEE Transaction on Power Electronics, Sept.

2007, pp 1649 – 1661. 3. R. Krishnan, Electric Motor Drives – Modeling, Analysis and Control, New Delhi, Prentice Hall

of India, 2003.

4. D.M. Bellur, M.K. Kazimierczuk and O.H. Dayton, DC-DC Converters for Electric Vehicle

Applications, Conference on Electrical Insulation and Electrical Manufacturing Expo, 22-24, Oct.

2007, Nashville, USA, pp 286 – 293.

5. S. Masoud Barakati, Applications of Matrix Converters for Wind Turbine Systems, Germany,

VDM Verlag Publishers, 2008.

B.E. ( ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 2011 ...

Documents

Transcript of B.E. ( ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING) 2011 ...